[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2021210773A1 - Electronic device and method for controlling same - Google Patents

Electronic device and method for controlling same Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021210773A1
WO2021210773A1 PCT/KR2021/002311 KR2021002311W WO2021210773A1 WO 2021210773 A1 WO2021210773 A1 WO 2021210773A1 KR 2021002311 W KR2021002311 W KR 2021002311W WO 2021210773 A1 WO2021210773 A1 WO 2021210773A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
electronic device
display
condition information
menu items
arrangement direction
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/KR2021/002311
Other languages
French (fr)
Korean (ko)
Inventor
μ„œμž₯원
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Samsung Electronics Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Samsung Electronics Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Samsung Electronics Co Ltd filed Critical Samsung Electronics Co Ltd
Publication of WO2021210773A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021210773A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0481Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance
    • G06F3/0482Interaction with lists of selectable items, e.g. menus
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16Constructional details or arrangements
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1601Constructional details related to the housing of computer displays, e.g. of CRT monitors, of flat displays
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F2200/00Indexing scheme relating to G06F1/04 - G06F1/32
    • G06F2200/16Indexing scheme relating to G06F1/16 - G06F1/18
    • G06F2200/161Indexing scheme relating to constructional details of the monitor
    • G06F2200/1614Image rotation following screen orientation, e.g. switching from landscape to portrait mode

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an electronic device and a control method thereof, and more particularly, to an electronic device capable of displaying a UI including a plurality of menu items selectable by a user and a control method thereof.
  • An electronic device provided with a display such as a television (TV), receives various contents provided from an external source and displays an image based thereon.
  • a display such as a television (TV)
  • receives various contents provided from an external source and displays an image based thereon.
  • a user may select any one of a plurality of sources so that the electronic device receives content from the selected source, and for this purpose, the display includes menu items corresponding to a plurality of sources capable of providing content, and various user interfaces (UIs) may be displayed.
  • UIs user interfaces
  • the display may be installed in various directions to allow a user to view images such as content and UI, and the electronic device may operate in any one of a plurality of screen modes in response to the installation direction of the display.
  • Menu items of the UI may be arranged in various directions according to conditions and displayed on the display. If the arrangement direction of these menu items does not match the screen mode of the display, it may cause visual fatigue to the user or cause inconvenience to the user in displaying or selecting the menu items.
  • the present invention provides an electronic device and a method for controlling the same for displaying a UI, so that menu items are arranged and displayed in a corresponding arrangement direction in consideration of conditions such as arrangement characteristics of menu items.
  • the present invention provides an electronic device capable of switching a screen mode of a display corresponding to an arrangement direction of a UI, and a method for controlling the same.
  • An electronic device includes a display; and obtaining direction identification condition information about the UI including a plurality of menu items selectable according to a user input, identifying an arrangement direction of the UI based on the obtained condition information, and identifying a plurality of menus of the UI in the identified arrangement direction and a processor for controlling the display such that the items are arranged.
  • the plurality of menu items include a first menu item and at least one second menu item that is a lower hierarchy of the first menu item, and the direction identification condition information relates to an arrangement characteristic of the first menu item and the second menu item. may contain information.
  • the processor may identify an arrangement direction of the UI based on at least one of a characteristic of a hierarchical direction or a characteristic of an item direction with respect to the UI including a plurality of menu items including the first menu item and the second menu item. .
  • the direction identification condition information may include a type of input means capable of receiving a user input.
  • the display may further include a driving unit rotatably provided, and the processor may control the driving unit to rotate the display in a screen mode corresponding to the identified UI arrangement direction.
  • the processor may identify the current screen mode of the display, and control the driving unit to rotate the display based on it being identified that the identified current screen mode does not correspond to the identified UI arrangement direction.
  • the processor identifies that the direction identification condition information is changed based on the user input for the plurality of menu items arranged in the identified arrangement direction, and rearranges the plurality of menu items in the arrangement direction of the UI based on the changed condition information
  • the display can be controlled as much as possible.
  • the display may further include a driving unit rotatably provided, and the processor may control the driving unit to rotate the display in a screen mode corresponding to the arrangement direction of the UI based on the changed condition information.
  • the direction identification condition information may include a current screen mode of the display.
  • the direction identification condition information may include at least one of user preference and history information.
  • a method of controlling an electronic device includes: acquiring direction identification condition information about a UI including a plurality of menu items selectable according to a user input; identifying an arrangement direction of the UI based on the obtained condition information; and causing the plurality of menu items of the UI to be arranged on the display in the identified arrangement direction.
  • the plurality of menu items include a first menu item and at least one second menu item that is a lower hierarchy of the first menu item, and the direction identification condition information relates to an arrangement characteristic of the first menu item and the second menu item. may contain information.
  • the step of identifying the arrangement direction of the UI may include: the UI including a plurality of menu items including a first menu item and a second menu item, based on at least one of a characteristic of a hierarchical direction or a characteristic of an item direction.
  • the alignment direction can be identified.
  • the direction identification condition information may include a type of input means capable of receiving a user input.
  • the method may further include rotating the display in a screen mode corresponding to the identified UI arrangement direction.
  • the method may further include rotating the display in a screen mode corresponding to the arrangement direction of the UI based on the changed condition information.
  • the direction identification condition information may include a current screen mode of the display.
  • the method includes a plurality of menu items selectable according to a user input.
  • Obtaining direction identification condition information about the UI comprising a; identifying an arrangement direction of the UI based on the obtained condition information; and causing the plurality of menu items of the UI to be arranged on the display in the identified arrangement direction.
  • a plurality of menu items are displayed in the arrangement direction of the identified UI according to a preset condition, thereby providing user convenience in displaying and selecting the menu items. can be improved.
  • the user's visual fatigue can be minimized by automatically switching the screen mode of the display in response to the identified UI arrangement direction.
  • FIG 1 shows an example of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 illustrates a state in which an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention rotates.
  • FIG. 3 illustrates a state in which the electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention rotates the display 90 degrees from the state of FIG. 1 .
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates examples of receiving a user input in an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a control operation of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates an example in which a UI including a plurality of items is displayed in the electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates a UI displayed when any one of a plurality of items is selected in FIG. 7 .
  • FIGS. 9, 10, and 11 are diagrams illustrating examples of displaying a UI in response to a type of input means as condition information in an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIGS. 12 and 13 are diagrams illustrating examples of displaying a UI in response to an arrangement characteristic of a menu item in an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a control operation of an electronic device according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • 15 is a diagram illustrating a control operation of an electronic device according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • 16 and 17 are diagrams illustrating examples of displaying a UI in response to an arrangement characteristic of a menu item in an electronic device according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a display is rotated in response to a source in the electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of displaying a UI in which a plurality of menu items are arranged in various directions in the electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • a 'module' or 'unit' performs at least one function or operation, and may be implemented as hardware or software or a combination of hardware and software, and is integrated into at least one module. and can be implemented.
  • at least one of the plurality of elements refers to all of the plurality of elements as well as each one or a combination thereof excluding the rest of the plurality of elements.
  • FIG 1 shows an example of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the electronic device 1 may be implemented as a display device including a display 110 as shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the electronic device 1 may include a stand 100 supporting the display 110 .
  • the display 110 may be disposed in a horizontal direction with respect to the stand 100 as shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the electronic device 1 may have a plurality of screen modes corresponding to the arrangement direction of the display 110 .
  • the plurality of screen modes may correspond to the arrangement state of the display 110 and may be implemented to be switchable by rotation.
  • the plurality of screen modes may include a landscape mode corresponding to a state in which the display 110 is horizontally arranged, as shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the display 110 In the landscape mode, the display 110 is positioned horizontally with respect to the stand 100 , and has a screen with a horizontal length longer than a vertical length as an aspect ratio.
  • the stand 100 may rotatably support the display 110 .
  • the display 110 may be provided to pivot around a central area of the screen. That is, the display 110 may rotate clockwise or counterclockwise at least between the L position and the P position, as shown in FIG. 1 .
  • FIG. 2 shows a state in which the electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention rotates
  • FIG. 3 shows a state in which the electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention rotates the display 90 degrees from the state of FIG. 1 .
  • the display 110 may be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise from the horizontal state of the L position shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the display 110 is positioned longitudinally relative to the stand 100 in the P position, as shown in FIG. 3 , based on a rotation of an angle, eg, 90 degrees, from the horizontal state of FIG. 1 . can be arranged.
  • the plurality of screen modes may include a portrait mode corresponding to a state in which the display 110 is vertically arranged, as shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the display 110 In the portrait mode, the display 110 is positioned vertically with respect to the stand 100 , and has a screen whose vertical length is longer than the horizontal length as an aspect ratio.
  • the electronic device 1 may be implemented such that a plurality of screen modes, ie, a landscape mode and a portrait mode, are interchangeable by rotation of the display 110 .
  • the display 110 in which the screen mode is a portrait mode may display an image produced in a portrait mode, that is, content produced by shooting a smartphone screen in a vertical state in a full screen.
  • the plurality of screen modes may further include a diagonal mode in which the display 110 is inclined at a predetermined angle, for example, 45 degrees, as shown in FIG. 2 , as well as a landscape mode and a portrait mode.
  • the diagonal mode may be plural according to a direction in which the display 110 is inclined, for example, left or right, and an inclined angle, that is, inclination.
  • a driving unit 150 that provides power for rotating the display 110 may be provided.
  • the implementation form of the electronic device 1 of the present invention is not limited to the form shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 .
  • the electronic device 1 does not include the stand 100 , and the display 110 may be rotatably installed on a wall surface.
  • the electronic device 1 receives a signal provided from an external signal source, that is, a source, for example, data related to content, and processes the received content data according to a preset process into an image. can be displayed.
  • an external signal source that is, a source, for example, data related to content
  • the electronic device 1 may be implemented as a display device provided with a display 110 capable of displaying an image, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 .
  • the electronic device 1 may be implemented as an image processing device such as a set-top box that transmits a signal to a separate connected display. .
  • the electronic device 1 implemented as a display device may be implemented as a television (TV) capable of processing a broadcast image based on at least one of a broadcast signal received from a transmission device of a broadcast station, broadcast information, or broadcast data.
  • TV television
  • the electronic device 1 may be provided with a tuner for tuning a broadcast signal for each channel.
  • the electronic device 1 When the electronic device 1 is a television, the electronic device 1 is an additional device that can be directly or connected to the electronic device 1 by a cable, for example, a set-top box (STB), an OC box. It is possible to receive broadcast content based on at least one of a broadcast signal, broadcast information, or broadcast data received from a transmission device of a broadcast station through a one-connect box, a media box, or the like.
  • the connection method between the electronic device 1 and the additional device is not limited to a cable, and various wired/wireless interfaces may be applied.
  • the electronic device 1 may wirelessly receive, for example, a radio frequency (RF) signal transmitted from a broadcasting station, that is, broadcast content, and for this purpose, the electronic device 1 may be provided with an antenna capable of receiving the signal.
  • RF radio frequency
  • broadcast content can be received through a terrestrial wave, cable, satellite, or the like, and a signal source, ie, a source, is not limited to a broadcasting station. That is, any device or station capable of transmitting and receiving data may be included in the source of the present invention.
  • the standard of the signal received by the electronic device 1 may be configured in various ways in response to the implementation form of the device, and the electronic device 1 corresponds to the implementation form of the interface unit (120 in FIG. 4 ) to be described later, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface), HDMI-CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), display port (DP), DVI, composite video, component video, super video, DVI (Digital) Visual Interface), Thunderbolt, RGB cable, SCART (Syndicat des Constructeurs d'Appareils Radiorecepteurs et Televiseurs), and USB (universal serial bus) signals can be received as video content by wire.
  • HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface
  • HDMI-CEC Consumer Electronics Control
  • display port DP
  • DVI composite video
  • component video component video
  • super video DVI (Digital) Visual Interface)
  • Thunderbolt RGB cable
  • SCART Syndicat des Constructeurs d'Appareils Radiorecepteurs et Televiseurs
  • USB universal serial bus
  • the electronic device 1 may be implemented as a smart TV or Internet Protocol TV (IP TV).
  • a smart TV can receive and display broadcast signals in real time, and has a web browsing function, so it is possible to search and consume various contents through the Internet at the same time as displaying real-time broadcast signals, and to provide a convenient user environment for this. am.
  • the smart TV since the smart TV includes an open software platform, it can provide interactive services to users. Accordingly, the smart TV can provide a user with various contents, for example, the contents of an application providing a predetermined service through an open software platform.
  • These applications are applications that can provide various types of services, and include, for example, applications that provide services such as SNS, finance, news, weather, maps, music, movies, games, and e-books.
  • the spirit of the present invention is not limited to the implementation examples of the electronic device 1, and the electronic device 1 includes various types of implementation examples capable of processing images in addition to the TV, for example, a desktop or a laptop. ) can also be applied to the monitor of a personal computer (PC).
  • the electronic device 1 of the present invention is provided with a display capable of operating by switching a plurality of screen modes including a smart pad such as a smart phone or a tablet. It may be implemented as a terminal device.
  • the electronic device 1 includes a user interface (UI) for controlling video, still image, application, on-screen display (OSD), and various operations based on signals/data stored in internal/external storage media.
  • UI user interface
  • OSD on-screen display
  • the signal can be processed to display the back on the screen.
  • the electronic device 1 may receive content from various external devices including a server and a terminal device through wired or wireless network communication, and the type of communication is not limited.
  • the electronic device 1 corresponds to an implementation form of the interface unit 120 to be described later, such as Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Direct, Bluetooth, and Bluetooth low energy. , Zigbee (Zigbee), UWB (Ultra-Wideband), NFC (Near Field Communication), etc.
  • a signal corresponding to the standard may be received as video content through wireless network communication.
  • the electronic device 1 may receive a content signal through wired network communication such as Ethernet.
  • the server may be provided as a content provider capable of transmitting content to various devices including the electronic device 1 through a wired or wireless network.
  • the server may provide a media file such as video on demand (VOD) or web content in a real-time streaming method.
  • VOD video on demand
  • web content in a real-time streaming method.
  • a plurality of servers may be provided.
  • the electronic device 1 may be implemented to receive various contents from each of the connected servers by accessing each of the plurality of servers.
  • the electronic device 1 may receive media content such as VOD from, for example, a web server such as YouTube or an OTT server capable of providing an over the top (OTT) service such as Netflix.
  • media content such as VOD from, for example, a web server such as YouTube or an OTT server capable of providing an over the top (OTT) service such as Netflix.
  • OTT over the top
  • the electronic device 1 executes an application for content reproduction, for example, a VOD application, receives content from a server, and processes the received content, so that an image corresponding to the content is output through the display 110, that is, , can be displayed.
  • an application for content reproduction for example, a VOD application
  • receives content from a server and processes the received content, so that an image corresponding to the content is output through the display 110, that is, , can be displayed.
  • the electronic device 1 may receive content from the server using a user account corresponding to the executed application.
  • the terminal device may include a smart phone, a smart pad such as a tablet, and the like.
  • the electronic device 1 may receive content from a terminal device connected by wireless communication, so-called screen mirroring.
  • the electronic device 1 may perform a screen mirroring operation by receiving an image of content displayed on the screen of a terminal device such as a smart phone and outputting it through the display 110 .
  • the transmission of content between the electronic device 1 and the terminal device may be performed by a mirroring method in which the terminal device transmits data of the content decoded by the decoder to the electronic device 1 .
  • the transmission of content between the electronic device 1 and the terminal device is not limited to the above description, and various methods may be applied. That is, as another embodiment, data of undecoded content, for example, may be performed by a cast method of transmitting address information of the content. In the cast method, the content may be decoded by the decoder of the electronic device 1 and displayed on the display 110 .
  • transmission of the content may include at least one of mirroring and casting.
  • the electronic device 1 may receive content from a plurality of sources including a broadcasting station, a server, a terminal device, and the like.
  • the display 110 may display a UI that is selectable by a user and includes a plurality of menu items respectively corresponding to a plurality of sources.
  • the electronic device 1 may receive content from a source corresponding to the selected menu item, and an image based thereon may be displayed through the display 110 .
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the configuration of the electronic device 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention shown in FIG. 4 is only an example, and the electronic device according to another embodiment may be implemented in a configuration other than the configuration shown in FIG. 4 . have. That is, the electronic device 1 of the present invention may be implemented in a form in which a configuration other than the configuration shown in FIG. 4 is added or at least one of the configuration shown in FIG. 4 is excluded. In addition, the electronic device 1 of the present invention may be implemented in a form in which a part of the configuration configured in FIG. 4 is changed.
  • the electronic device 1 may include a display 110 as shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the display 110 may display an image.
  • the implementation method of the display 110 is not limited, and for example, liquid crystal, plasma, light-emitting diode, organic light-emitting diode, surface conduction electron gun ( It can be implemented in various display methods such as surface-conduction electron-emitter), carbon nano-tube, and nano-crystal.
  • the display 110 includes a display panel for displaying an image, and may further include an additional component, for example, a driver according to an implementation method thereof.
  • an image of content received from a source may be displayed on the display 110 .
  • a UI including a plurality of menu items selectable by a user may be displayed on the display 110 .
  • the plurality of menu items may be implemented as text or graphic icons having a visual shape.
  • the plurality of menu items of the UI may be arranged and displayed in a predetermined direction, for example, horizontally, vertically, or diagonally.
  • each of the plurality of menu items of the UI may be implemented in the form of particles floating on the screen of the display 110 , that is, particles.
  • the electronic device 1 identifies the arrangement direction of the UI based on the direction identification condition information for the UI, and a plurality of menu items corresponding to the identified arrangement direction of the UI on the screen of the display 110 . This can be arranged.
  • the electronic device 1 may include an interface unit 120 .
  • the interface unit 120 enables the electronic device 1 to communicate with various external devices including a server.
  • the interface unit 120 may include a wired interface unit 121 .
  • the wired interface unit 121 may include a connection unit for transmitting/receiving signals/data according to standards such as HDMI, HDMI-CEC, USB, Component, Display Port (DP), DVI, Thunderbolt, RGB cable, etc. can Here, the wired interface unit 121 may include at least one connector, terminal, or port corresponding to each of these standards.
  • the wired interface unit 121 may be implemented in a form including an input port for receiving a signal from a source, and in some cases, may further include an output port to transmit/receive signals in both directions.
  • the wired interface unit 121 is configured to connect an antenna capable of receiving a broadcast signal according to a broadcasting standard such as terrestrial/satellite broadcasting, or a cable capable of receiving a broadcast signal according to the cable broadcasting standard to be connected, an HDMI port, a DisplayPort , DVI port, Thunderbolt, composite video, component video, super video, SCART, etc. may include a connector or port according to the video and / or audio transmission standard.
  • the electronic device 1 may have a built-in antenna capable of receiving a broadcast signal.
  • the electronic device 1 may further include a tuner for tuning the received broadcast signal for each channel.
  • the tuner may include a demodulator that demodulates a broadcast signal of a specific tuned channel and outputs a signal in the form of a transport stream (TS).
  • TS transport stream
  • the tuner and the demodulator may be designed as a single integrated chip, or may be implemented as two separate chips.
  • the wired interface unit 121 may include a connector or port according to a universal data transmission standard such as a USB port.
  • the wired interface unit 121 may include a connector or a port to which an optical cable can be connected according to an optical transmission standard.
  • the wired interface unit 121 is connected to an external microphone or an external audio device having a microphone, and may include a connector or port capable of receiving or inputting an audio signal from the audio device.
  • the wired interface unit 121 is connected to an audio device such as a headset, earphone, or external speaker, and may include a connector or port capable of transmitting or outputting an audio signal to the audio device.
  • the wired interface unit 121 may include a connector or port according to a network transmission standard such as Ethernet.
  • the wired interface unit 121 may be implemented as a LAN card connected to a router or a gateway by wire.
  • the wired interface unit 121 is connected to an external device such as a set-top box, an optical media player, or an external display device, a speaker, a server, and the like through a connector or port in a 1:1 or 1:N (N is a natural number) method.
  • an external device such as a set-top box, an optical media player, or an external display device, a speaker, a server, and the like
  • N is a natural number
  • the wired interface unit 121 may include a connector or a port for separately transmitting video/audio signals.
  • the wired interface unit 121 may be implemented as a communication circuitry including a wireless communication module (S/W module, chip, etc.) corresponding to various types of communication protocols.
  • a wireless communication module S/W module, chip, etc.
  • the wired interface unit 121 is embedded in the electronic device 1 , but may be implemented in the form of a dongle or a module to be detachably attached to the connector of the electronic device 1 .
  • the interface unit 120 may include a wireless interface unit 122 .
  • the wireless interface unit 122 may be implemented in various ways corresponding to the implementation form of the electronic device 1 .
  • the wireless interface unit 122 is a communication method such as RF (radio frequency), Zigbee (Zigbee), Bluetooth (bluetooth), Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi), UWB (Ultra WideBand) and NFC (Near Field Communication), etc. Wireless communication can be used.
  • the wireless interface unit 122 may be implemented as a communication circuitry including a wireless communication module (S/W module, chip, etc.) corresponding to various types of communication protocols.
  • a wireless communication module S/W module, chip, etc.
  • the wireless interface unit 122 includes a wireless LAN unit.
  • the wireless LAN unit may be wirelessly connected to an external device through an access point (AP) under the control of the processor 170 .
  • the wireless LAN unit includes a WiFi module.
  • the wireless interface unit 122 includes a wireless communication module that wirelessly supports one-to-one direct communication between the electronic device 1 and an external device without an access point.
  • the wireless communication module may be implemented to support communication methods such as Wi-Fi Direct, Bluetooth, and Bluetooth low energy.
  • the storage unit 140 may store identification information (eg, MAC address or IP address) on the external device, which is a communication target device.
  • the wireless interface unit 122 is provided to perform wireless communication with an external device by at least one of a wireless LAN unit and a wireless communication module according to performance.
  • the air interface unit 122 may further include a communication module using various communication methods such as mobile communication such as LTE, EM communication including a magnetic field, and visible light communication.
  • the wireless interface unit 122 may transmit and receive data packets to and from the external device by wirelessly communicating with an external device such as a server on a network.
  • the wireless interface unit 122 may include an IR transmitter and/or an IR receiver capable of transmitting and/or receiving an IR (Infrared) signal according to an infrared communication standard.
  • the wireless interface unit 122 may receive or input a remote control signal from a remote control or other external device through an IR transmitter and/or an IR receiver, or transmit or output a remote control signal to another external device.
  • the electronic device 1 may transmit/receive a remote control signal to and from the remote control or other external device through the wireless interface unit 122 of another method such as Wi-Fi or Bluetooth.
  • the wireless interface unit 122 may transmit predetermined data as information of a user's voice received through a voice input unit such as a microphone to an external device such as a server.
  • a voice input unit such as a microphone
  • an external device such as a server.
  • the form/type of the transmitted data is not limited, and for example, an audio signal corresponding to a voice uttered by a user or a voice characteristic extracted from the audio signal may be included.
  • the wireless interface unit 122 may receive data of the processing result of the user's voice from an external device such as a server.
  • the electronic device 1 may output a sound corresponding to the voice processing result through an internal or external loudspeaker based on the received data.
  • the above-described embodiment is an example, and the user's voice may be processed by itself in the electronic device 1 without transmitting the user's voice to the server. That is, in another embodiment, the electronic device 1 may be implemented to perform the role of a speech to text (STT) server.
  • STT speech to text
  • the electronic device 1 may communicate with an input device such as a remote control through the wireless interface unit 122 to receive a sound signal corresponding to a user voice from the input device.
  • an input device such as a remote control
  • the wireless interface unit 122 may communicate with an input device such as a remote control through the wireless interface unit 122 to receive a sound signal corresponding to a user voice from the input device.
  • a communication module that communicates with an external server and the like and a communication module that communicates with the remote control may be different from each other.
  • the electronic device 1 may communicate with the server through an Ethernet modem or Wi-Fi module, and may communicate with a remote controller and a Bluetooth module.
  • a communication module for communicating with an external server and the like and a communication module for communicating with the remote control may be the same.
  • the electronic device 1 may communicate with a server and a remote controller through a Bluetooth module.
  • the wireless interface unit 122 is embedded in the electronic device 1 , but may be implemented in the form of a dongle or a module to be detachably attached to the connector of the electronic device 1 .
  • the electronic device 1 may include a user input unit 130 .
  • the user input unit 130 transmits various preset control commands or non-limited information to the processor 170 according to a user's input.
  • the user input unit 130 includes various input means capable of receiving a user input.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates examples of receiving a user input in an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the user input unit 130 may include a keypad (or input panel) including buttons such as a power key, a number key, and a menu key provided in the electronic device 1 .
  • the user input unit 130 may include an input device that generates a preset command/data/information/signal to remotely control the electronic device 1 and transmits the generated command/data/information/signal to the electronic device 1 .
  • the input device includes a remote control 201, a game console 202, a keyboard, a mouse, and the like, and an electronic device 1 and is separated from each other, it is possible to receive a user input.
  • At least one button for receiving a user input may be provided in the remote control 201 .
  • the remote control 201 may be provided with a touch sensing unit that receives a user's touch input and/or a motion sensing unit that detects movement of the remote control 201 itself by the user.
  • the input device includes a terminal device 203 such as a smartphone on which a remote control application is installed, and in this case, a user's touch input through the touch screen can be received.
  • the input device becomes an external device capable of wireless communication with the main body of the electronic device 1, and wireless communication includes Bluetooth, infrared communication, RF communication, wireless LAN, Wi-Fi Direct, and the like.
  • the user input unit 130 may include a voice input unit 205 for receiving a voice/sound uttered by the user.
  • the voice input unit 250 is implemented as a microphone capable of receiving a user's voice, and the microphone is provided in the electronic device 1 , or provided separately from the electronic device 1 , or the electronic device 1 . It may be provided in another device spaced apart from each other, for example, the remote control 201 .
  • the user input unit 130 may include a motion detection unit 204 that detects a motion of the user's hand, that is, a hand gesture (hereinafter, also referred to as a gesture).
  • the electronic device 1 may output data by detecting a movement distance, a movement speed, an area of a movement region, and the like, of the motion detection unit 204 of the hand.
  • the electronic device 1 may provide a trigger feedback therefor through the display 110 or the like.
  • the electronic device 1 may obtain motion information of a gesture by using data output from the motion sensing unit 204 and perform an operation corresponding thereto.
  • the electronic device 1 may compare and correct the obtained motion information with data stored in the storage unit 140 , and perform an operation of a command corresponding to the result, thereby operating the electronic device 1 . can be controlled.
  • the electronic device 1 may include a storage unit 140 .
  • the storage unit 140 is configured to store various data of the electronic device 1 .
  • the storage unit 140 may retain data even if the power supplied to the electronic device 1 is cut off, and may be provided as a writable non-volatile memory (writable ROM) to reflect changes. That is, the storage unit 140 may be provided with any one of a flash memory, an EPROM, or an EEPROM.
  • the storage unit 140 may further include a volatile memory such as DRAM or SRAM, in which the read or write speed of the electronic device 1 is faster than that of the nonvolatile memory.
  • Extended Display Identification Data is stored in the storage unit 140 , and the EDID includes resolution information of the display 110 displaying an image.
  • EDID is used herein as a term including Enhanced Extended Display Identification Data (E-EDID).
  • the data stored in the storage unit 140 includes, for example, an operating system for driving the electronic device 1 , and various programs, applications, image data, and additional data executable on the operating system.
  • the storage unit 140 may store signals or data input/output corresponding to the operation of each component under the control of the processor 170 .
  • the storage unit 140 includes a control program for controlling the electronic device 1, a UI related to an application provided by a manufacturer or downloaded from outside, a graphic or image for providing the UI, user information, documents, databases, or related data. can be saved
  • the storage unit 140 stores a TV application or a TV client as a program for operating the electronic device 1 as a television, and a VOD application as a program for playing content received from a source such as a server.
  • a TV application or a TV client as a program for operating the electronic device 1 as a television
  • a VOD application as a program for playing content received from a source such as a server.
  • the image displayed in the electronic device 1 may be derived from data stored in the nonvolatile storage unit 140 such as a flash memory or a hard disk.
  • the storage unit 140 may be provided inside or outside the electronic device 1 , and when provided outside, the storage unit 140 may be connected to the electronic device 1 through the wired interface unit 121 .
  • the term β€œstorage unit” refers to a storage unit 140, a ROM (not shown) in the processor 170, a RAM (not shown), or mountable in the electronic device 1 . It is defined as including a memory card (not shown) (eg, micro SD card, memory stick).
  • the electronic device 1 may include a driving unit 150 .
  • the driving unit 150 may provide power to rotate the display 110 .
  • the driving unit 150 may be implemented as a motor having a rotation shaft capable of forward rotation or reverse rotation, for example.
  • the driving unit 150 may be provided on the stand 100 and connected to the rear of the display 110 .
  • the display 110 is mounted on the rotating shaft of the driving unit 150 , and when the rotating shaft rotates as the driving unit 150 is driven, the display 110 may be rotated in a forward or reverse direction in response thereto.
  • the control signal transmitted to the driving unit 150 may be provided by, for example, the processor 170 provided in the stand 100 .
  • a control signal may be output to the driving unit 150 according to a user input through a user input unit 130 such as a remote control.
  • the electronic device 1 may cause the display 110 to switch between a landscape mode and a portrait mode based on the rotation of the driving unit 150 .
  • the electronic device 1 may include a direction sensing unit 160 .
  • the direction detecting unit 160 may identify the current screen mode or the change of the screen mode of the display 110 .
  • the direction detecting unit 160 may include one or more sensors provided inside the stand 100 to detect a rotation angle or a rotation state of the display 110 .
  • the direction detecting unit 160 is a gyroscope for measuring a change in the orientation of an object by using the property of always maintaining the initially set constant direction, or to detect the movement, that is, rotation of the display 110 . It can be implemented as an accelerometer, etc.
  • the electronic device 1 identifies whether the arrangement direction of the UI including the plurality of menu items corresponds to the screen mode of the display 110 identified by the direction sensing unit 160 , that is, matches.
  • the display 110 may be rotated by the driving unit 150 so as to be in a screen mode corresponding to the arrangement direction of the UI.
  • the display 110 may operate in the vertical mode.
  • the electronic device 1 may include a processor 170 .
  • the processor 170 controls all components of the electronic device 1 to operate.
  • the processor 170 includes a control program (or instructions) for performing such a control operation, a non-volatile memory in which the control program is installed, a volatile memory in which at least a part of the installed control program is loaded, and the loaded control program. It may include at least one general-purpose processor that executes, for example, a microprocessor, an application processor, or a central processing unit (CPU).
  • the processor 170 may include a single core, a dual core, a triple core, a quad core, and multiple cores thereof.
  • the processor 170 includes a plurality of processors, for example, a main processor and a sub processor operating in a sleep mode (eg, only standby power is supplied and does not operate as a display device). ) may be included.
  • the processor, ROM, and RAM may be interconnected through an internal bus.
  • the processor 170 may include an image processing unit that performs various preset processes on a content signal received from a source.
  • the processor 170 may display an image corresponding to the image signal on the display 110 by outputting an output signal generated or combined by performing image processing to the display 110 .
  • the image processing unit may include a decoder that decodes the image signal to correspond to the image format of the electronic device 1 , and a scaler that adjusts the image signal to match the output standard of the display 110 .
  • the decoder is, for example, but not limited to, an H.264 decoder. That is, the video decoder according to the embodiment of the present invention can be implemented as a decoder according to various compression standards, such as a Moving Picture Experts Group (MPEG) decoder or a High Efficiency Video Codec (HEVC) decoder.
  • MPEG Moving Picture Experts Group
  • HEVC High Efficiency Video Codec
  • the type of content processed by the image processing unit is not limited.
  • the content that can be processed by the image processing unit may further include a picture such as a JPEG file, a still image such as a background screen, and a menu item of a UI, as well as a moving picture such as a video.
  • the type of the image processing process performed by the image processing unit of the present invention is not limited, for example, de-interlacing for converting an interlace broadcasting signal into a progressive method, and image quality improvement. At least one of various processes such as noise reduction, detail enhancement, frame refresh rate conversion, and line scanning may be performed.
  • the image processing unit may be implemented as an image board in which circuit configurations such as various chipsets, memories, electronic components, and wiring for performing each of these processes are mounted on a printed circuit board (PCB).
  • the electronic device 1 may include a processor 170 including a tuner and an image processing unit on a single image board.
  • a processor 170 including a tuner and an image processing unit on a single image board.
  • this is only an example and may be disposed on a plurality of printed circuit boards communicatively connected to each other.
  • the processor 170 may process the corresponding signal so that an image of a predetermined channel is displayed based on the broadcast signal. In addition, the processor 170 may process the signal so that an image of a predetermined content is displayed based on a signal received from the server through the interface unit 120 .
  • the processor 170 may be implemented in a form included in a main SoC mounted on a PCB embedded in the electronic device 1 .
  • the control program may include program(s) implemented in the form of at least one of a BIOS, a device driver, an operating system, firmware, a platform, and an application.
  • the application is pre-installed or stored in the electronic device 1 when the electronic device 1 is manufactured, or receives data of the application from the outside when used later, and based on the received data, the electronic device (1) can be installed.
  • Data of the application may be downloaded to the electronic device 1 from, for example, an external server such as an application market.
  • an external server is an example of the computer program product of the present invention, but is not limited thereto.
  • the control program may be recorded in a storage medium readable by a device such as a computer.
  • the device-readable storage medium may be provided in the form of a non-transitory storage medium or a non-volatile storage medium.
  • 'non-transitory storage medium' is a tangible device and only means that it does not contain a signal (eg, electromagnetic wave). It does not distinguish the case where it is stored as
  • the 'non-transitory storage medium' may include a buffer in which data is temporarily stored.
  • the processor 170 identifies an arrangement direction of the UI including a plurality of menu items based on a preset condition, and the plurality of menu items of the UI are arranged in the identified arrangement direction to be displayed on the display 110 .
  • a control operation can be performed to be displayed.
  • the processor 170 may obtain direction identification condition information, and identify the arrangement direction of the UI based on the obtained condition information.
  • the direction identification condition information may include information indicating a preset condition, such as arrangement characteristics of a plurality of menu items.
  • the plurality of menu items may have a hierarchical structure including a first menu item, that is, a main menu item, and at least one second menu item, that is, a sub-menu item, which is a lower hierarchy of the first menu item.
  • the direction identification condition information may include information about the arrangement characteristics of the first menu item and the second menu item.
  • a plurality of menu items may be arranged in two dimensions (directions): hierarchies and individual items.
  • a plurality of menu items may be arranged in a direction corresponding to a hierarchy (hereinafter, also referred to as a hierarchical direction) and a direction corresponding to the item(s) in a single hierarchy (hereinafter also referred to as an item direction), for example,
  • a hierarchical direction may correspond to a horizontal direction
  • an item direction may correspond to a vertical direction, respectively.
  • the processor 170 may identify the arrangement direction of the UI based on at least one of a characteristic of a hierarchical direction or a characteristic of an item direction as an arrangement characteristic of the menu items.
  • the characteristics of the hierarchical direction and the characteristics of the item direction may be determined in consideration of the size (width or height) of each unit item constituting the first menu item and the second menu item, the arrangement interval, the size of the display 110 , and the like.
  • the processor 170 may compare the length of the hierarchical direction with the length of the item direction, and identify the arrangement direction of the UI to correspond to any one direction having a larger value. For example, when the length of the hierarchical direction is greater than the length of the item direction, the arrangement direction of the UI may be identified as the hierarchical direction, that is, the horizontal direction. As another example, when the length of the item direction is greater than the length of the hierarchical direction, the arrangement direction of the UI may be identified as the item direction, that is, the vertical direction.
  • the processor 170 may identify that the lengths in both directions are different.
  • the processor 170 sets the number of steps in the menu in the hierarchical direction, for example, the number of steps corresponding to each layer in a hierarchical structure consisting of a first menu item and at least one second menu item.
  • the arrangement direction of the UI corresponds to the hierarchical direction, that is, the horizontal direction.
  • the first reference value may be determined in consideration of the size (width or height) of each unit item constituting the first menu item and the second menu item, an arrangement interval, the size of the display 110, and the like, and the value is not limited. .
  • the processor 170 compares the number of menu items in the item direction, for example, the number of menu items in a single step, with a preset second reference value, and when the number of menu items is equal to or greater than the second reference value, , it can be identified that the arrangement direction of the UI corresponds to the item direction, that is, the vertical direction.
  • the second reference value is .
  • the size (width or height) of each unit item constituting the first menu item and the second menu item, an arrangement interval, the size of the display 110, etc. may be taken into consideration, and the value is not limited.
  • the direction identification condition information is an arrangement characteristic of a menu item
  • the direction identification condition information is not limited to an arrangement characteristic of a menu item.
  • the direction identification condition information may include, for example, the type of input means capable of receiving user input, user preference, history information, and various types of information obtainable or derived from the electronic device 1 such as the current screen mode of the display 110 . may contain information.
  • the user's preference and history information may be stored in advance in the storage unit 140 or a server connectable through the interface unit 110 .
  • the processor 170 may derive a UI arrangement direction preferred by the user based on learning using the history information.
  • the current screen mode of the display 110 may be obtained using the output of the direction detecting unit 160 .
  • the processor 170 may identify the arrangement direction of the UI as a horizontal direction.
  • the method of obtaining condition information for identifying the arrangement direction of the UI is not limited, and the processor 170, for example, data stored in the storage unit 140, received through the user input unit 130 To obtain direction identification condition information from a user input, data received from an external device connectable through the interface unit 120 , and output data of at least one sensor provided in the electronic device 1 including the direction sensing unit 160 . can
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a control operation of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the processor 170 of the electronic device 1 obtains direction identification condition information regarding a UI including a plurality of menu items selectable according to a user input, and ( 301 ), an arrangement direction of the UI is identified based on the obtained condition information ( 302 ), and the display 110 can be controlled to be arranged in a plurality of menu items of the UI in the identified arrangement direction ( 303 ).
  • the operation of the processor 170 as described above may be implemented as a computer program stored in a computer program product (not shown) provided separately from the electronic device 1 .
  • the computer program product includes a non-transitory or non-volatile memory in which instructions corresponding to the computer program are stored, and a processor.
  • the instruction when executed by the processor, obtains rental direction identification condition information for a UI including a plurality of menu items, identifies an arrangement direction of the UI based on the obtained condition information, and identifies a plurality of UIs in the identified arrangement direction. This includes having them arranged in a menu item of .
  • the electronic device 1 may download and execute a computer program stored in a separate computer program product to perform the operation of the processor 170 .
  • FIG. 7 illustrates an example in which a UI including a plurality of items is displayed in the electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 8 illustrates a UI displayed when any one of the plurality of items is selected in FIG. 7 . It is a drawing.
  • the processor 170 of the electronic device 1 may control a UI including a plurality of menu items 401 , 402 , 403 , 404 , and 405 selectable by a user to be displayed on the display 110 .
  • each of the plurality of menu items of the UI corresponds to a source that can be connected to the electronic device 1 and can provide content
  • FIG. 7 illustrates a UI screen displayed for selecting a source as an example. it is shown for
  • the processor 170 displays a UI including menu items 401, 402, 403, 404, 405 in the form of particles floating on the screen, ie, particles on the display 110 ) can be displayed.
  • the UI screen of FIG. 7 may be continuously displayed without separating/discriminating a no signal situation and a source selection situation of the electronic device 1 .
  • the no-signal step and the source selection step are not visually distinguished. .
  • the display 110 is an initial screen, as shown in FIG. 7 , a connectable source
  • a plurality of menu items 401, 402, 403, 404, and 405 corresponding to are floating, that is, a UI screen that moves within the screen may be displayed.
  • the UI screen is an animation in which a plurality of menu items 401, 402, 403, 404, and 405 are repeatedly/continuously ejected from one position of the display 110, for example, from the center, that is, flowing out. Looping can be played.
  • the user selects any one 405 of the menu items 401, 402, 403, 404, and 405 using the user input unit 130 while the UI screen is displayed, that is, reproduced as shown in FIG. , a source connected to the electronic device 1 may be selected.
  • the processor 170 Based on the user's selection of the menu item 405 of any one source, that is, the source to be connected, the processor 170 generates the selected menu items 405 and 406 . , 407 may be gradually enlarged to display the control display 110 .
  • a so-called zoom in animation effect is applied to the corresponding menu items 405 , 406 , and 407 so that the menu items 405 , 406 , 407 are displayed on the display 110 .
  • the electronic device 1 may be connected to a source corresponding to the selected menu items 405 , 406 , and 407 by wire or wirelessly.
  • the processor 170 may receive a signal from the connected source through the interface unit 120 , and an image 408 corresponding thereto may be displayed on the display 110 .
  • the electronic device 1 from a no-signal state without a connected source, selects a source desired by the user, receives the content from the source, and provides the It is implemented so that a seamless experience can be naturally provided to users without interruption.
  • the electronic device 1 may display a different UI layout on the display 110 according to various condition information. That is, the electronic device 1 may change the layout of the UI based on the condition information.
  • the layout of the UI includes, but is not limited to, an arrangement direction of a plurality of menu items.
  • the condition information may be set in various ways, and, for example, as described above, may include direction identification condition information for the UI.
  • FIGS. 9, 10, and 11 are diagrams illustrating examples of displaying a UI in response to a type of input means as condition information in an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the processor 170 obtains direction identification condition information regarding a UI including a plurality of menu items, identifies an arrangement direction of the UI based on the obtained condition information, and arranges the identified UI
  • the display 110 may be controlled so that a plurality of menu items of the UI are arranged in the direction.
  • the direction identification condition information may include a type of input means capable of receiving a user input.
  • the processor 170 identifies the arrangement direction of the UI corresponding thereto for each type of the user input unit 130 , that is, input means for receiving the user input, and a plurality of menus in the identified arrangement direction.
  • the UI can be displayed so that the items are arranged.
  • the arrangement direction of the UI for each type of input means is a predetermined direction that is easier for the user to check the user input or input result when using the input means, and is preset by default or set by the user, 140) can be stored.
  • the processor 170 displays a plurality of menu items 501 , 502 , and 503 horizontally on the display 110 .
  • the UI can be displayed to be arranged in a direction.
  • each of the menu items 501 , 502 , and 503 corresponds to a source providing content as an example, but is not limited thereto.
  • the processor 170 When the user selects any one item 501 from among the menu items 501 , 502 , and 503 arranged in the horizontal direction using the remote control 201 , the processor 170 , as shown in FIG. 9 , the selected item 501 . ) may be controlled to be displayed to be identified by at least one of a size, a shape, and a color.
  • the processor 170 when a user input for selecting any one menu item is received while a UI including a plurality of menu items is displayed, the processor 170 is configured to the user input unit 130 , that is, the user The display 110 may be controlled so that the layout of the UI is changed and displayed according to the type of input means for receiving the input.
  • the user input unit 130 is a voice input unit such as a microphone.
  • a user input for selecting any one item 601 may be received through 205 .
  • the processor 170 displays the moved item 602 zoomed in, that is, gradually enlarged, while the selected item 601 is moved to a predetermined position, for example, the center of the display 110 .
  • the display 110 may be controlled so as to be possible.
  • the user's hand as the user input unit 130
  • the motion detection unit 240 for detecting the movement that is, a gesture, may be used.
  • the processor 170 may control the display 110 to provide trigger feedback for the gesture input.
  • the type of trigger feedback is not limited, and for example, an icon indicating a gesture input may be included, and an animation effect may be applied to the icon.
  • the processor 170 after providing the trigger feedback, as shown in FIG. 11 , a virtual pointer 704 that is movable in response to the position of the hand movement sensed through the motion detection unit 240 is displayed on the display 110 .
  • a virtual pointer 704 that is movable in response to the position of the hand movement sensed through the motion detection unit 240 is displayed on the display 110 .
  • the shape of the pointer 704 is not limited, and as an example, as shown in FIG. 11 , a hand may be shaped to enable immediate feedback on a gesture input.
  • the processor 170 may apply an animation effect in which an item 701 close to the pointer 704 from among the plurality of menu items 701 , 702 , 703 , and 704 abuts against the pointer 704 .
  • the processor 170 zooms in, that is, gradually enlarges the selected item 701 as shown in FIG.
  • the display 110 may be controlled to be displayed.
  • the electronic device 1 can provide immediate feedback to the user by changing and displaying the UI layout according to the type of input means.
  • the plurality of menu items of the UI may include a first menu item and at least one second menu item that is a lower layer of the first menu item.
  • the UI may have a hierarchical structure consisting of a main menu and sub-menu(s).
  • the processor 170 obtains information about the arrangement characteristics of the first menu item and the second menu item as direction identification condition information about the UI, and obtains the obtained condition information, that is, the arrangement characteristics of the menu items. It is possible to identify the arrangement direction of the UI based on the , and control the display 110 so that menu items of the UI are arranged in the identified arrangement direction of the UI.
  • the arrangement characteristic of the menu item may include, for example, a characteristic of a hierarchical direction or a characteristic of an item direction, but is not limited thereto.
  • FIGS. 12 and 13 are diagrams illustrating examples of displaying a UI in response to an arrangement characteristic of a menu item in an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the processor 170 sets the arrangement direction of the UI in the horizontal direction corresponding to the hierarchical direction.
  • the processor 170 sets the arrangement direction of the UI in the horizontal direction corresponding to the hierarchical direction.
  • the processor 170 may identify the arrangement direction of the UI as a horizontal direction.
  • the first reference value may be, for example, set to 3, but is not limited thereto.
  • the UI includes the main menu 801, 802, the first sub-menu 803, 804, 805, and the second sub-menu 806, 807 of three or more steps.
  • the UI may be arranged in a horizontal direction. Accordingly, the user may select the items 802 , 805 , and 807 at a glance through the pointing cursor by operating the user input unit 130 such as the remote control 201 in each step.
  • the processor 170 sets the arrangement direction of the UI in the vertical direction corresponding to the item direction. can be identified.
  • the processor 170 may identify the arrangement direction of the UI as a vertical direction.
  • the second reference value may be, for example, set to 8, but is not limited thereto.
  • the UI includes main menus 901 and 902 and submenus 903 , 904 and 905 , and submenus 903 , 904 , 905 as the number of menus in the item direction.
  • the UI may be arranged in the vertical direction. Accordingly, the user can move the pointing cursor by manipulating the user input unit 130 such as the remote control 201 while checking a large number of items 903, 904, and 905 of the sub-menu at a glance to make selection easier. can
  • the configuration of the plurality of menu items of the UI to be displayed does not match the hierarchical direction characteristic or the item direction characteristic preset as an arrangement characteristic of the menu items, for example, the hierarchical direction
  • the predetermined default direction for example, the display 110 may be controlled to display a UI in which menu items are arranged in a horizontal direction.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a control operation of an electronic device according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the electronic device 1 further identifies whether the arrangement direction of the UI identified based on the condition information corresponds to the current screen mode of the display 110 . , is implemented to display the UI such that a plurality of menu items are arranged in a screen mode corresponding to the arrangement direction of the UI.
  • the processor 170 of the electronic device 1 may obtain direction identification condition information regarding a UI including a plurality of menu items ( 1201 ).
  • the direction identification condition information may include at least one of an arrangement characteristic of menu items, a type of input means capable of receiving a user input, a user's preference, and history information.
  • the processor 170 may identify the arrangement direction of the UI based on the condition information obtained in step 1201 ( 1202 ).
  • the arrangement direction of the UI may be identified as a horizontal direction corresponding to the hierarchical direction.
  • the UI includes the main menus 801, 802, the first sub-menus 803, 804, 805, and the second sub-menus 806, 807.
  • the arrangement direction of the UI may be identified as a horizontal direction.
  • the arrangement direction of the UI may be identified as a vertical direction corresponding to the item direction.
  • the UI includes main menus 901, 902 and sub-menus 903, 904, and 905, and as the number of menus in the item direction, sub-menus 903, 904, and 905 are When the number is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the arrangement direction of the UI may be identified as a vertical direction.
  • a current screen mode of the processor 170 and the display 110 may be identified ( 1203 ).
  • the processor 170 may identify whether the current screen mode of the display 110 is a landscape mode or a portrait mode.
  • the processor 170 may identify the screen mode based on the resolution information of the display 110 .
  • the processor 170 may acquire information about the current screen mode by reading the EDID from the storage unit 140 .
  • the processor 170 may identify the current screen mode by obtaining information about the rotation state of the display 110 from the direction sensing unit 160 .
  • the processor 170 may identify whether the arrangement direction of the UI identified in step 1202 and the screen mode of the display 110 identified in step 1203 correspond, that is, match ( 1204 ).
  • the arrangement direction of the UI and the screen mode do not correspond to the processor 170
  • the arrangement direction of the UI is identified as the horizontal direction in step 1202
  • the screen mode of the display 110 in step 1203 When is identified in the portrait mode (NO in step 1204), the driving unit 150 may be controlled to rotate the display 110 in response to the arrangement direction of the UI identified in step 1203 ( 1205 ).
  • the display 110 in the vertical mode is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving unit 150 as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3 . Can be switched to landscape mode.
  • the processor 170 may control the plurality of menu items of the UI to be arranged in the arrangement direction identified in step 1205 on the display 110 rotated in step 1205 ( 1206 ). Accordingly, the UI can be displayed on the display 110 in the screen mode corresponding to the arrangement direction of the UI identified in step 1202 .
  • the electronic device 1 in response to the arrangement characteristics of menu items including the first menu item (main menu item) and the second menu item (sub-menu item), the electronic device 1 displays the display 110 .
  • the display 110 By displaying the UI by switching the rotation mode, it is possible to provide the user with visual stability and convenience of user input.
  • FIGS. 16 and 17 are examples of displaying a UI in response to an arrangement characteristic of menu items in an electronic device according to another embodiment of the present invention is a diagram showing the
  • the change of condition information It is implemented to detect and rearrange a plurality of menu items of the UI in response to the arrangement direction of the UI identified based on the changed condition information.
  • the processor 170 of the electronic device 1 may obtain direction identification condition information regarding a UI including a plurality of menu items ( 1301 ).
  • the direction identification condition information may include at least one of an arrangement characteristic of menu items, a type of input means capable of receiving a user input, a user's preference, and history information.
  • the processor 170 may identify the arrangement direction of the UI based on the condition information obtained in step 1301 ( 1302 ).
  • the arrangement direction of the UI may be identified as described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13 , and, for example, may be identified as either a horizontal direction or a vertical direction.
  • the processor 170 may control the plurality of menu items of the UI to be arranged in the arrangement direction identified in step 1302 (1303). For example, when the arrangement direction of the UI is identified in the horizontal direction in step 1302 , as shown in FIG. 16 , a plurality of menu items 1401 , 1402 , 1403 , 1404 may be arranged in the horizontal direction.
  • the user manipulates the user input unit 130 such as the remote control 201 to move the pointing cursor, and for a plurality of menu items 1401, 1402, 1403, 1404 arranged in the identified UI arrangement direction. User selection can be entered.
  • the processor 170 may identify whether the direction identification condition information is changed by a user selection or the like ( 1304 ).
  • the user selects the first item 1204 from among the items of the main menu. and select the second item 1403 from among the items 1403 and 1404 of the sub-menu.
  • the sub-menu of the selected second item 1403 has a number equal to or greater than the second reference value, it may be identified that the direction identification condition information has been changed.
  • the processor 170 drives the drive unit 150 so that the display 110 is rotated in a screen mode corresponding to the arrangement direction based on the condition information changed in step 1304.
  • the display 110 in the landscape mode as shown in FIG. 16 is connected to the driving unit 150 as described in FIGS. It can be rotated in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction by means of which it can be converted to a portrait mode as shown in FIG. 17 .
  • the processor 170 may control the plurality of menu items of the UI to be arranged in an arrangement direction identified based on the condition information changed in step 1304 on the display 110 rotated in step 1305 ( 1306 ). . Accordingly, a UI in which a plurality of menu items are rearranged can be displayed on the screen mode corresponding to the arrangement direction identified based on the changed condition information, for example, the display 110 of the rotated portrait mode as shown in FIG. 17 . there will be
  • the electronic device 1 detects a change in the direction identification condition information, and displays the UI in a screen mode corresponding to the arrangement direction identified based on the changed condition information, so that the user can see more visually. It is possible to provide stability and convenience of user input.
  • the display 110 in a state in which the UI of a plurality of menu items corresponding to a source each of which can provide content is displayed, the display 110 is displayed corresponding to the selected source. It can be controlled to operate in screen mode.
  • the processor 170 may identify the current screen mode of the display 110 and rotate the display 110 to correspond to the selected source.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a display is rotated in response to a source in the electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the UI including a plurality of menu items 1501 and 1502 each corresponding to the source is displayed on the display 110 in landscape mode, for example, in a state where animation is played to move on the screen,
  • the user may select any one item 1501 as a source by using the user input unit 130 .
  • the processor 170 may identify the screen mode of the display 110 corresponding to the source corresponding to the selected items 1501 , 1503 , and 1506 .
  • the source corresponding to the selected items 1501, 1503, and 1506 is a device that provides content photographed in portrait mode, such as a smartphone
  • the corresponding screen mode is a portrait mode
  • the display 110 is By operating in portrait mode, content can be provided in full screen.
  • the processor 170 causes the selected items 1501 , 1503 , and 1506 to be gradually enlarged and displayed by the zoom-in animation effect while the driving unit 150 switches the screen mode of the display 110 . can control
  • the processor 170 applies an animation effect of a particle rotation transition that rotates together in the rotation direction of the display 110 for items 1504 and 1505 that are not selected as a source, as shown in FIG. 18 .
  • the processor 170 may apply a particle rotation transition effect to the unselected items 1504 and 1505 in response to the angle or inclination value at which the display 110 rotates.
  • the rotated items 1504 and 1505 gradually become invisible in the screen as the items 1501 , 1503 and 1506 selected as the source are enlarged.
  • the arrangement direction of the UI is horizontal or vertical, or the case where particles are arranged in the form of floating on the screen has been mainly described as an example, but, as mentioned above, the UI
  • the arrangement direction may include directions other than horizontal and vertical, for example, a diagonal direction.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of displaying a UI in which a plurality of menu items are arranged in various directions in the electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • a system environment in which a plurality of electronic devices 1 are provided may be implemented, and as shown in FIG. 19 , displays 1610, 1620, 1630, 1640, A UI including a plurality of items may be displayed on 1650 and 1660 .
  • Each display 1610, 1620, 1630, 1640, 1650, 1660 can be installed to be arranged in various forms on the wall surface of a public place, a building lobby, an office, etc. As an example, as shown in FIG. 19, can be placed.
  • Each of the displays 1610 , 1620 , 1630 , 1640 , 1650 , and 1660 may display a UI for displaying a plurality of menu items arranged in a predetermined direction in response to a location at which they are installed or disposed. That is, in the embodiment of FIG. 19 , the direction identification condition information may include a location where each display 1610 , 1620 , 1630 , 1640 , 1650 , 1660 is installed or disposed in the system.
  • a UI including menu items 1611 and 1612 arranged in a horizontal direction may be displayed on the first display 1610 disposed at the upper center.
  • a UI including menu items 1641 and 1642 arranged in a horizontal direction may also be displayed on the fourth display 1640 disposed at the lower center.
  • a plurality of menu items 1621 in a diagonal direction corresponding to the installation or arrangement position thereof. 1630) arranged UI may be displayed.
  • a UI in which a plurality of menu items 1651 and 1661 are arranged in a diagonal direction corresponding to the installation or arrangement position is displayed on the fifth display 1650 and the sixth display 1660 respectively arranged in the upper left and lower portions.
  • the arrangement direction of the UI of each display 1620 , 1630 , 1650 , and 1660 that is, the diagonal angle and the direction are not limited to the illustrated bar.
  • the menu items 1611 , 1612 , 1621 , 1631 , 1641 , 1642 , 1651 , 1661 arranged in a predetermined direction are displayed in a predetermined direction. It can be displayed while moving continuously, and in the overall system, the menu items (1611, 1612, 1621, 1631, 1641, 1642, 1651, 1661) can cause a visual effect of rotating clockwise or counterclockwise,
  • the UI can be utilized in various ways.
  • the method according to various embodiments disclosed in this document may be provided as included in a computer program product.
  • Computer program products may be traded between sellers and buyers as commodities.
  • the computer program product is distributed in the form of a device-readable storage medium (eg compact disc read only memory (CD-ROM)), or through an application store (eg Play StoreTM) or on two user devices (eg, It can be distributed (eg downloaded or uploaded) directly, online between smartphones (eg: smartphones).
  • a portion of the computer program product eg, a downloadable app
  • a machine-readable storage medium such as a memory of a manufacturer's server, a server of an application store, or a relay server. It may be temporarily stored or temporarily created.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention relates to an electronic device and a method for controlling same. The electronic device comprises: a display; and a processor which obtains direction identification condition information about a UI including a plurality of menu items that can be selected according to user input, identifies the arrangement direction of the UI on the basis of the obtained condition information, and controls the display so that the plurality of menu items of the UI are arranged in the identified arrangement direction.

Description

μ „μžμž₯치 및 κ·Έ μ œμ–΄λ°©λ²•Electronic device and its control method

λ³Έ 발λͺ…은 μ „μžμž₯치 및 κ·Έ μ œμ–΄λ°©λ²•μ— κ΄€ν•œ κ²ƒμœΌλ‘œμ„œ, 보닀 μƒμ„Έν•˜κ²ŒλŠ” μ‚¬μš©μžκ°€ 선택 κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UIλ₯Ό ν‘œμ‹œν•  수 μžˆλŠ” μ „μžμž₯치 및 κ·Έ μ œμ–΄λ°©λ²•μ— κ΄€ν•œ 것이닀.The present invention relates to an electronic device and a control method thereof, and more particularly, to an electronic device capable of displaying a UI including a plurality of menu items selectable by a user and a control method thereof.

ν…”λ ˆλΉ„μ „(TV)κ³Ό 같은 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄κ°€ 마련된 μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜λŠ” μ™ΈλΆ€μ˜ μ†ŒμŠ€λ‘œλΆ€ν„° μ œκ³΅λ˜λŠ” λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹ ν•˜μ—¬, 그에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•œ μ˜μƒμ΄ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μ— ν‘œμ‹œλ˜λ„λ‘ ν•œλ‹€.An electronic device provided with a display, such as a television (TV), receives various contents provided from an external source and displays an image based thereon.

μ‚¬μš©μžλŠ” 볡수의 μ†ŒμŠ€ 쀑 μ–΄λŠ ν•˜λ‚˜λ₯Ό μ„ νƒν•˜μ—¬ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜κ°€ μ„ νƒλœ μ†ŒμŠ€λ‘œλΆ€ν„° μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹ ν•˜λ„λ‘ ν•  수 있으며, 이λ₯Ό μœ„ν•΄ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μ—λŠ” μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό 제곡 κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ 볡수의 μ†ŒμŠ€μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” 메뉴항λͺ©λ“€μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜μ—¬ λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ μ‚¬μš©μž μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€(UI)κ°€ ν‘œμ‹œλ  수 μžˆλ‹€.A user may select any one of a plurality of sources so that the electronic device receives content from the selected source, and for this purpose, the display includes menu items corresponding to a plurality of sources capable of providing content, and various user interfaces (UIs) may be displayed.

λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λŠ” λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ λ°©ν–₯으둜 μ„€μΉ˜λ˜μ–΄ μ‚¬μš©μžκ°€ μ»¨ν…νŠΈ, UI λ“±μ˜ μ˜μƒμ„ μ‹œμ²­ν•˜λ„λ‘ ν•  수 있으며, μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜λŠ” λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μ˜ μ„€μΉ˜ λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ 볡수의 ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œ 쀑 μ–΄λŠ ν•˜λ‚˜λ‘œ λ™μž‘ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.The display may be installed in various directions to allow a user to view images such as content and UI, and the electronic device may operate in any one of a plurality of screen modes in response to the installation direction of the display.

UI의 메뉴항λͺ©λ“€μ€ 쑰건에 따라 λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ λ°©ν–₯으둜 λ°°μ—΄λ˜μ–΄ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μ— ν‘œμ‹œλ  수 μžˆλ‹€. μ΄λŸ¬ν•œ 메뉴항λͺ©λ“€μ˜ λ°°μ—΄ λ°©ν–₯이 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μ˜ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œμ™€ λ§€μΉ˜λ˜μ§€ μ•ŠμœΌλ©΄, μ‚¬μš©μžμ—κ²Œ μ‹œκ°μ μΈ ν”Όλ‘œλ₯Ό μœ λ°œν•˜κ±°λ‚˜, 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ ν‘œμ‹œ λ˜λŠ” 선택에 μžˆμ–΄ μ‚¬μš©μžμ—κ²Œ λΆˆνŽΈμ„ μ΄ˆλž˜ν•˜λŠ” κ²½μš°κ°€ λ°œμƒλ  수 μžˆλ‹€.Menu items of the UI may be arranged in various directions according to conditions and displayed on the display. If the arrangement direction of these menu items does not match the screen mode of the display, it may cause visual fatigue to the user or cause inconvenience to the user in displaying or selecting the menu items.

λ³Έ 발λͺ…은, UIλ₯Ό ν‘œμ‹œν•˜λŠ”λ° μžˆμ–΄, 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄νŠΉμ„±κ³Ό 같은 쑰건을 κ³ λ €ν•˜μ—¬, λŒ€μ‘λ˜λŠ” λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 메뉴항λͺ©λ“€μ˜ λ°°μ—΄λ˜μ–΄ ν‘œμ‹œλ˜λ„λ‘ ν•˜λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치 및 κ·Έ μ œμ–΄λ°©λ²•μ„ μ œκ³΅ν•œλ‹€.The present invention provides an electronic device and a method for controlling the same for displaying a UI, so that menu items are arranged and displayed in a corresponding arrangement direction in consideration of conditions such as arrangement characteristics of menu items.

λ˜ν•œ, λ³Έ 발λͺ…은, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μ˜ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ₯Ό μ „ν™˜μ‹œν‚¬ 수 μžˆλŠ” μ „μžμž₯치 및 κ·Έ μ œμ–΄λ°©λ²•μ„ μ œκ³΅ν•œλ‹€.In addition, the present invention provides an electronic device capable of switching a screen mode of a display corresponding to an arrangement direction of a UI, and a method for controlling the same.

λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜λŠ”, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄; 및 μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯에 따라 선택 κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UI에 κ΄€ν•œ λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보λ₯Ό νšλ“ν•˜κ³ , νšλ“λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 μ‹λ³„ν•˜κ³ , μ‹λ³„λœ λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 UI의 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ λ°°μ—΄λ˜λ„λ‘ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•˜λŠ” ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œλ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•œλ‹€.An electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention includes a display; and obtaining direction identification condition information about the UI including a plurality of menu items selectable according to a user input, identifying an arrangement direction of the UI based on the obtained condition information, and identifying a plurality of menus of the UI in the identified arrangement direction and a processor for controlling the display such that the items are arranged.

볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ€, 제1메뉴항λͺ©κ³Ό 제1메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ ν•˜μœ„ 계측인 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ 제2메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λ©°, λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λŠ”, 제1메뉴항λͺ©κ³Ό 제2메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄ νŠΉμ„±μ— κ΄€ν•œ 정보λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The plurality of menu items include a first menu item and at least one second menu item that is a lower hierarchy of the first menu item, and the direction identification condition information relates to an arrangement characteristic of the first menu item and the second menu item. may contain information.

ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œλŠ”, 제1메뉴항λͺ©κ³Ό 제2메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UI에 κ΄€ν•œ, 계측방ν–₯의 νŠΉμ„± λ˜λŠ” ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯의 νŠΉμ„± 쀑 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ— κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The processor may identify an arrangement direction of the UI based on at least one of a characteristic of a hierarchical direction or a characteristic of an item direction with respect to the UI including a plurality of menu items including the first menu item and the second menu item. .

λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λŠ”, μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯이 μˆ˜μ‹  κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ μž…λ ₯μˆ˜λ‹¨μ˜ μ’…λ₯˜λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The direction identification condition information may include a type of input means capable of receiving a user input.

λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ₯Ό νšŒμ „ κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜κ²Œ λ§ˆλ ¨λ˜λŠ” ꡬ동뢀λ₯Ό 더 ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λ©°, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œλŠ”, μ‹λ³„λœ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ‘œ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄κ°€ νšŒμ „ν•˜λ„λ‘ ꡬ동뢀λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.The display may further include a driving unit rotatably provided, and the processor may control the driving unit to rotate the display in a screen mode corresponding to the identified UI arrangement direction.

ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œλŠ”, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μ˜ ν˜„μž¬ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ₯Ό μ‹λ³„ν•˜κ³ , μ‹λ³„λœ ν˜„μž¬ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œκ°€ μ‹λ³„λœ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” μ•ŠλŠ” κ²ƒμœΌλ‘œ 식별됨에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄κ°€ νšŒμ „ν•˜λ„λ‘ ꡬ동뢀λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.The processor may identify the current screen mode of the display, and control the driving unit to rotate the display based on it being identified that the identified current screen mode does not correspond to the identified UI arrangement direction.

ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œλŠ”, μ‹λ³„λœ λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 λ°°μ—΄λœ 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ— λŒ€ν•œ μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬, λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보가 λ³€κ²½λ˜λŠ” 것을 μ‹λ³„ν•˜κ³ , λ³€κ²½λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•œ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ μž¬λ°°μ—΄λ˜λ„λ‘ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.The processor identifies that the direction identification condition information is changed based on the user input for the plurality of menu items arranged in the identified arrangement direction, and rearranges the plurality of menu items in the arrangement direction of the UI based on the changed condition information The display can be controlled as much as possible.

λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ₯Ό νšŒμ „ κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜κ²Œ λ§ˆλ ¨λ˜λŠ” ꡬ동뢀λ₯Ό 더 ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λ©°, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œλŠ”, λ³€κ²½λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•œ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ‘œ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄κ°€ νšŒμ „ν•˜λ„λ‘ ꡬ동뢀λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.The display may further include a driving unit rotatably provided, and the processor may control the driving unit to rotate the display in a screen mode corresponding to the arrangement direction of the UI based on the changed condition information.

λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λŠ”, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μ˜ ν˜„μž¬ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The direction identification condition information may include a current screen mode of the display.

λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λŠ”, μ‚¬μš©μžμ˜ μ„ ν˜Έλ„ λ˜λŠ” νžˆμŠ€ν† λ¦¬ 정보 쀑 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The direction identification condition information may include at least one of user preference and history information.

ν•œνŽΈ, λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯치의 μ œμ–΄λ°©λ²•μ€, μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯에 따라 선택 κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UI에 κ΄€ν•œ λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보λ₯Ό νšλ“ν•˜λŠ” 단계; νšλ“λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 μ‹λ³„ν•˜λŠ” 단계; 및 μ‹λ³„λœ λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 UI의 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μ— λ°°μ—΄λ˜λ„λ‘ ν•˜λŠ” 단계λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•œλ‹€.Meanwhile, a method of controlling an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention includes: acquiring direction identification condition information about a UI including a plurality of menu items selectable according to a user input; identifying an arrangement direction of the UI based on the obtained condition information; and causing the plurality of menu items of the UI to be arranged on the display in the identified arrangement direction.

볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ€, 제1메뉴항λͺ©κ³Ό 제1메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ ν•˜μœ„ 계측인 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ 제2메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λ©°, λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λŠ”, 제1메뉴항λͺ©κ³Ό 제2메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄ νŠΉμ„±μ— κ΄€ν•œ 정보λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The plurality of menu items include a first menu item and at least one second menu item that is a lower hierarchy of the first menu item, and the direction identification condition information relates to an arrangement characteristic of the first menu item and the second menu item. may contain information.

UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 μ‹λ³„ν•˜λŠ” λ‹¨κ³„λŠ”, 제1메뉴항λͺ©κ³Ό 제2메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UI에 κ΄€ν•œ, 계측방ν–₯의 νŠΉμ„± λ˜λŠ” ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯의 νŠΉμ„± 쀑 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ— κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The step of identifying the arrangement direction of the UI may include: the UI including a plurality of menu items including a first menu item and a second menu item, based on at least one of a characteristic of a hierarchical direction or a characteristic of an item direction. The alignment direction can be identified.

λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λŠ”, μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯이 μˆ˜μ‹  κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ μž…λ ₯μˆ˜λ‹¨μ˜ μ’…λ₯˜λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The direction identification condition information may include a type of input means capable of receiving a user input.

μ‹λ³„λœ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ‘œ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ₯Ό νšŒμ „μ‹œν‚€λŠ” 단계λ₯Ό 더 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The method may further include rotating the display in a screen mode corresponding to the identified UI arrangement direction.

λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μ˜ ν˜„μž¬ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ₯Ό μ‹λ³„ν•˜λŠ” 단계; 및 μ‹λ³„λœ ν˜„μž¬ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œκ°€ μ‹λ³„λœ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” μ•ŠλŠ” κ²ƒμœΌλ‘œ 식별됨에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ₯Ό νšŒμ „μ‹œν‚€λŠ” 단계λ₯Ό 더 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.identifying a current screen mode of the display; and rotating the display based on it being identified that the identified current screen mode does not correspond to the identified UI arrangement direction.

μ‹λ³„λœ λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 λ°°μ—΄λœ 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ— λŒ€ν•œ μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬, λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보가 λ³€κ²½λ˜λŠ” 것을 μ‹λ³„ν•˜λŠ” 단계; 및 λ³€κ²½λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•œ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μ— 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ μž¬λ°°μ—΄λ˜λ„λ‘ ν•˜λŠ” 단계λ₯Ό 더 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.identifying a change in direction identification condition information based on a user input for a plurality of menu items arranged in the identified arrangement direction; and rearranging the plurality of menu items on the display in the arrangement direction of the UI based on the changed condition information.

λ³€κ²½λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•œ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ‘œ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ₯Ό νšŒμ „μ‹œν‚€λŠ” 단계λ₯Ό 더 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The method may further include rotating the display in a screen mode corresponding to the arrangement direction of the UI based on the changed condition information.

λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λŠ”, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μ˜ ν˜„μž¬ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The direction identification condition information may include a current screen mode of the display.

ν•œνŽΈ, λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯치의 ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œμ— μ˜ν•΄ μ‹€ν–‰ κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ λ°©λ²•μ˜ ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨μ΄ 기둝된, 컴퓨터에 μ˜ν•΄ 독취가λŠ₯ν•œ λΉ„νœ˜λ°œμ„±μ˜ 기둝맀체에 μžˆμ–΄μ„œ, 방법은, μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯에 따라 선택 κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UI에 κ΄€ν•œ λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보λ₯Ό νšλ“ν•˜λŠ” 단계; νšλ“λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 μ‹λ³„ν•˜λŠ” 단계; 및 μ‹λ³„λœ λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 UI의 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μ— λ°°μ—΄λ˜λ„λ‘ ν•˜λŠ” 단계λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•œλ‹€.On the other hand, in the non-volatile, computer-readable recording medium in which a program of a method executable by a processor of an electronic device is recorded according to an embodiment of the present invention, the method includes a plurality of menu items selectable according to a user input. Obtaining direction identification condition information about the UI comprising a; identifying an arrangement direction of the UI based on the obtained condition information; and causing the plurality of menu items of the UI to be arranged on the display in the identified arrangement direction.

μƒκΈ°ν•œ 바와 같은 λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ˜ μ „μžμž₯치 및 κ·Έ μ œμ–΄λ°©λ²•μ— λ”°λ₯΄λ©΄, 미리 μ„€μ •λœ 쑰건에 따라 μ‹λ³„λœ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ λ°°μ—΄λ˜κ²Œ ν‘œμ‹œν•¨μœΌλ‘œμ¨, 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ ν‘œμ‹œ 및 κ·Έ 선택에 μžˆμ–΄ μ‚¬μš©μžμ˜ νŽΈμ˜κ°€ ν–₯상될 수 μžˆλ‹€. According to the electronic device and the control method of the present invention as described above, a plurality of menu items are displayed in the arrangement direction of the identified UI according to a preset condition, thereby providing user convenience in displaying and selecting the menu items. can be improved.

λ˜ν•œ, λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ˜ μ „μžμž₯치 및 κ·Έ μ œμ–΄λ°©λ²•μ— λ”°λ₯΄λ©΄, μ‹λ³„λœ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μ˜ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ₯Ό μžλ™μœΌλ‘œ μ „ν™˜ν•¨μœΌλ‘œμ¨, μ‚¬μš©μžμ˜ μ‹œκ°μ  ν”Όλ‘œλ„κ°€ μ΅œμ†Œν™”λ  수 μžˆλ‹€.In addition, according to the electronic device and the control method of the present invention, the user's visual fatigue can be minimized by automatically switching the screen mode of the display in response to the identified UI arrangement direction.

도 1은 λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— μ˜ν•œ μ „μžμž₯치의 일둀λ₯Ό λ„μ‹œν•œλ‹€.1 shows an example of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 2λŠ” λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— μ˜ν•œ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜κ°€ νšŒμ „ν•˜λŠ” λͺ¨μŠ΅μ„ λ„μ‹œν•œλ‹€.2 illustrates a state in which an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention rotates.

도 3은 λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— μ˜ν•œ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜κ°€ 도 1의 μƒνƒœλ‘œλΆ€ν„° λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ₯Ό 90도 νšŒμ „μ‹œν‚¨ μƒνƒœλ₯Ό λ„μ‹œν•œλ‹€.3 illustrates a state in which the electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention rotates the display 90 degrees from the state of FIG. 1 .

도 4λŠ” λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— μ˜ν•œ μ „μžμž₯치의 ꡬ성을 λ„μ‹œν•œ 블둝도이닀.4 is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 5λŠ” λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜μ—μ„œ μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯이 μˆ˜μ‹ λ˜λŠ” μ˜ˆλ“€μ„ λ„μ‹œν•œλ‹€.5 illustrates examples of receiving a user input in an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 6은 λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯치의 μ œμ–΄ λ™μž‘μ„ λ„μ‹œν•œ 도면이닀.6 is a diagram illustrating a control operation of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 7은 λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜μ—μ„œ 볡수의 ν•­λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UIκ°€ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ˜λŠ” 일둀λ₯Ό λ„μ‹œν•œλ‹€.7 illustrates an example in which a UI including a plurality of items is displayed in the electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 8은 도 7μ—μ„œ 볡수의 ν•­λͺ© 쀑 μ–΄λŠ ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ 선택함에 따라 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ˜λŠ” UIλ₯Ό λ„μ‹œν•œλ‹€.FIG. 8 illustrates a UI displayed when any one of a plurality of items is selected in FIG. 7 .

도 9, 도 10 및 도 11은 λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜μ—μ„œ μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λ‘œμ„œ μž…λ ₯μˆ˜λ‹¨μ˜ μ’…λ₯˜μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ UIλ₯Ό λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄ν•˜λŠ” μ˜ˆλ“€μ„ λ„μ‹œν•œ 도면이닀.9, 10, and 11 are diagrams illustrating examples of displaying a UI in response to a type of input means as condition information in an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 12 및 도 13은 λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜μ—μ„œ 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄νŠΉμ„±μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ UIλ₯Ό λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄ν•˜λŠ” μ˜ˆλ“€μ„ λ„μ‹œν•œ 도면이닀.12 and 13 are diagrams illustrating examples of displaying a UI in response to an arrangement characteristic of a menu item in an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 14λŠ” λ³Έ 발λͺ… λ‹€λ₯Έ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ˜ μ „μžμž₯치의 μ œμ–΄ λ™μž‘μ„ λ„μ‹œν•œ 도면이닀.14 is a diagram illustrating a control operation of an electronic device according to another embodiment of the present invention.

도 15λŠ” λ³Έ 발λͺ… 또 λ‹€λ₯Έ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ˜ μ „μžμž₯치의 μ œμ–΄ λ™μž‘μ„ λ„μ‹œν•œ 도면이닀.15 is a diagram illustrating a control operation of an electronic device according to another embodiment of the present invention.

도 16 및 도 17은 λ³Έ 발λͺ… 또 λ‹€λ₯Έ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜μ—μ„œ 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄νŠΉμ„±μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ UIλ₯Ό λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄ν•˜λŠ” μ˜ˆλ“€μ„ λ„μ‹œν•œ 도면이닀.16 and 17 are diagrams illustrating examples of displaying a UI in response to an arrangement characteristic of a menu item in an electronic device according to another embodiment of the present invention.

도 18은 λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ˜ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜μ—μ„œ μ†ŒμŠ€μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄κ°€ νšŒμ „λ˜λŠ” 일둀λ₯Ό λ„μ‹œν•œ 도면이닀.18 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a display is rotated in response to a source in the electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 19λŠ” λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ˜ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜μ—μ„œ 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ λ°©ν–₯으둜 λ°°μ—΄λœ UIλ₯Ό λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄ν•˜λŠ” 예λ₯Ό λ„μ‹œν•œ 도면이닀.19 is a diagram illustrating an example of displaying a UI in which a plurality of menu items are arranged in various directions in the electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

μ΄ν•˜μ—μ„œλŠ” 첨뢀 도면을 μ°Έμ‘°ν•˜μ—¬ λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ˜ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆλ“€μ„ μƒμ„Ένžˆ μ„€λͺ…ν•œλ‹€. λ„λ©΄μ—μ„œ λ™μΌν•œ 참쑰번호 λ˜λŠ” λΆ€ν˜ΈλŠ” μ‹€μ§ˆμ μœΌλ‘œ λ™μΌν•œ κΈ°λŠ₯을 μˆ˜ν–‰ν•˜λŠ” κ΅¬μ„±μš”μ†Œλ₯Ό μ§€μΉ­ν•˜λ©°, λ„λ©΄μ—μ„œ 각 κ΅¬μ„±μš”μ†Œμ˜ ν¬κΈ°λŠ” μ„€λͺ…μ˜ λͺ…λ£Œμ„±κ³Ό 편의λ₯Ό μœ„ν•΄ κ³Όμž₯λ˜μ–΄ μžˆμ„ 수 μžˆλ‹€. λ‹€λ§Œ, λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ˜ 기술적 사상과 κ·Έ 핡심 ꡬ성 및 μž‘μš©μ΄ μ΄ν•˜μ˜ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— μ„€λͺ…λœ ꡬ성 λ˜λŠ” μž‘μš©μœΌλ‘œλ§Œ ν•œμ •λ˜μ§€λŠ” μ•ŠλŠ”λ‹€. λ³Έ 발λͺ…을 μ„€λͺ…함에 μžˆμ–΄μ„œ λ³Έ 발λͺ…κ³Ό κ΄€λ ¨λœ 곡지 기술 λ˜λŠ” ꡬ성에 λŒ€ν•œ ꡬ체적인 μ„€λͺ…이 λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ˜ μš”μ§€λ₯Ό λΆˆν•„μš”ν•˜κ²Œ 흐릴 수 μžˆλ‹€κ³  νŒλ‹¨λ˜λŠ” κ²½μš°μ—λŠ” κ·Έ μƒμ„Έν•œ μ„€λͺ…을 μƒλž΅ν•˜κΈ°λ‘œ ν•œλ‹€.Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings. In the drawings, the same reference numbers or symbols refer to components that perform substantially the same function, and the size of each component in the drawings may be exaggerated for clarity and convenience of description. However, the technical spirit of the present invention and its core configuration and operation are not limited to the configuration or operation described in the following embodiments. In describing the present invention, if it is determined that a detailed description of a known technology or configuration related to the present invention may unnecessarily obscure the gist of the present invention, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ˜ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, 제1, 제2 λ“±κ³Ό 같이 μ„œμˆ˜λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” μš©μ–΄λŠ” ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ κ΅¬μ„±μš”μ†Œλ₯Ό λ‹€λ₯Έ κ΅¬μ„±μš”μ†Œλ‘œλΆ€ν„° κ΅¬λ³„ν•˜λŠ” λͺ©μ μœΌλ‘œλ§Œ μ‚¬μš©λ˜λ©°, λ‹¨μˆ˜μ˜ ν‘œν˜„μ€ λ¬Έλ§₯상 λͺ…λ°±ν•˜κ²Œ λ‹€λ₯΄κ²Œ λœ»ν•˜μ§€ μ•ŠλŠ” ν•œ, 볡수의 ν‘œν˜„μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•œλ‹€. λ˜ν•œ, λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ˜ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, 'κ΅¬μ„±λ˜λ‹€', 'ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λ‹€', 'κ°€μ§€λ‹€' λ“±μ˜ μš©μ–΄λŠ” ν•˜λ‚˜ λ˜λŠ” κ·Έ μ΄μƒμ˜ λ‹€λ₯Έ νŠΉμ§•λ“€μ΄λ‚˜ 숫자, 단계, λ™μž‘, κ΅¬μ„±μš”μ†Œ, λΆ€ν’ˆ λ˜λŠ” 이듀을 μ‘°ν•©ν•œ κ²ƒλ“€μ˜ 쑴재 λ˜λŠ” λΆ€κ°€ κ°€λŠ₯성을 미리 λ°°μ œν•˜μ§€ μ•ŠλŠ” κ²ƒμœΌλ‘œ μ΄ν•΄λ˜μ–΄μ•Ό ν•œλ‹€. λ˜ν•œ, λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ˜ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, 'λͺ¨λ“ˆ' ν˜Ήμ€ 'λΆ€'λŠ” 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ κΈ°λŠ₯μ΄λ‚˜ λ™μž‘μ„ μˆ˜ν–‰ν•˜λ©°, ν•˜λ“œμ›¨μ–΄ λ˜λŠ” μ†Œν”„νŠΈμ›¨μ–΄λ‘œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ˜κ±°λ‚˜ ν•˜λ“œμ›¨μ–΄μ™€ μ†Œν”„νŠΈμ›¨μ–΄μ˜ κ²°ν•©μœΌλ‘œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 있으며, 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ λͺ¨λ“ˆλ‘œ μΌμ²΄ν™”λ˜μ–΄ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€. λ˜ν•œ, λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ˜ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, 볡수의 μš”μ†Œ 쀑 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜(at least one)λŠ”, 볡수의 μš”μ†Œ μ „λΆ€λΏλ§Œ μ•„λ‹ˆλΌ, 볡수의 μš”μ†Œ 쀑 λ‚˜λ¨Έμ§€λ₯Ό λ°°μ œν•œ 각 ν•˜λ‚˜ ν˜Ήμ€ μ΄λ“€μ˜ μ‘°ν•© λͺ¨λ‘λ₯Ό μ§€μΉ­ν•œλ‹€.In an embodiment of the present invention, terms including an ordinal number such as first, second, etc. are used only for the purpose of distinguishing one element from another element, and the expression of the singular is plural unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. includes the expression of In addition, in an embodiment of the present invention, terms such as 'consisting', 'comprising', 'having' and the like are one or more other features or the presence of numbers, steps, operations, components, parts, or combinations thereof. Or it should be understood that the possibility of addition is not excluded in advance. In addition, in an embodiment of the present invention, a 'module' or 'unit' performs at least one function or operation, and may be implemented as hardware or software or a combination of hardware and software, and is integrated into at least one module. and can be implemented. Further, in an embodiment of the present invention, at least one of the plurality of elements refers to all of the plurality of elements as well as each one or a combination thereof excluding the rest of the plurality of elements.

도 1은 λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— μ˜ν•œ μ „μžμž₯치의 일둀λ₯Ό λ„μ‹œν•œλ‹€. 1 shows an example of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ”, 도 1에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μž₯μΉ˜λ‘œμ„œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€. In an embodiment of the present invention, the electronic device 1 may be implemented as a display device including a display 110 as shown in FIG. 1 .

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λ₯Ό μ§€μ§€ν•˜λŠ” μŠ€νƒ λ“œ(100)λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λŠ”, 도 1에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, μŠ€νƒ λ“œ(100)에 λŒ€ν•˜μ—¬ κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 배치될 수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the electronic device 1 may include a stand 100 supporting the display 110 . The display 110 may be disposed in a horizontal direction with respect to the stand 100 as shown in FIG. 1 .

λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯΄λ©΄, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 배치 λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ 볡수의 ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ₯Ό κ°€μ§ˆ 수 μžˆλ‹€.According to an embodiment of the present invention, the electronic device 1 may have a plurality of screen modes corresponding to the arrangement direction of the display 110 .

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, 볡수의 ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλŠ” λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 배치 μƒνƒœμ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λ©°, νšŒμ „μ— μ˜ν•΄ μ „ν™˜ κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜λ„λ‘ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the plurality of screen modes may correspond to the arrangement state of the display 110 and may be implemented to be switchable by rotation.

볡수의 ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλŠ”, 도 1에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)κ°€ κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 배치된 μƒνƒœμ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” κ°€λ‘œλͺ¨λ“œ(landscape mode)λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. κ°€λ‘œλͺ¨λ“œμ—μ„œ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λŠ” μŠ€νƒ λ“œ(100)에 λŒ€ν•΄ μˆ˜ν‰μœΌλ‘œ μœ„μΉ˜ν•˜λ©°, μ’…νš‘λΉ„λ‘œμ„œ κ°€λ‘œκΈΈμ΄κ°€ μ„Έλ‘œκΈΈμ΄λ³΄λ‹€ κΈ΄ 화면을 κ°€μ§€κ²Œ λœλ‹€.The plurality of screen modes may include a landscape mode corresponding to a state in which the display 110 is horizontally arranged, as shown in FIG. 1 . In the landscape mode, the display 110 is positioned horizontally with respect to the stand 100 , and has a screen with a horizontal length longer than a vertical length as an aspect ratio.

μŠ€νƒ λ“œ(100)λŠ” λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λ₯Ό νšŒμ „ κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜κ²Œ μ§€μ§€ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.The stand 100 may rotatably support the display 110 .

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λŠ”, ν™”λ©΄μ˜ μ€‘μ•™μ˜μ—­μ„ μ€‘μ‹¬μœΌλ‘œ 피봇(pivot)ν•˜λ„λ‘ 마련될 수 μžˆλ‹€. 즉, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λŠ”, 도 1에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, 적어도 L μœ„μΉ˜ 및 P μœ„μΉ˜ 사이λ₯Ό μ‹œκ³„λ°©ν–₯ λ˜λŠ” λ°˜μ‹œκ³„λ°©ν–₯으둜 νšŒμ „ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the display 110 may be provided to pivot around a central area of the screen. That is, the display 110 may rotate clockwise or counterclockwise at least between the L position and the P position, as shown in FIG. 1 .

도 2λŠ” λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— μ˜ν•œ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜κ°€ νšŒμ „ν•˜λŠ” λͺ¨μŠ΅μ„ λ„μ‹œν•˜λ©°, 도 3은 λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— μ˜ν•œ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜κ°€ 도 1의 μƒνƒœλ‘œλΆ€ν„° λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ₯Ό 90도 νšŒμ „μ‹œν‚¨ μƒνƒœλ₯Ό λ„μ‹œν•œλ‹€.FIG. 2 shows a state in which the electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention rotates, and FIG. 3 shows a state in which the electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention rotates the display 90 degrees from the state of FIG. 1 .

λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λŠ”, 도 2에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, 도 1에 λ„μ‹œλœ L μœ„μΉ˜μ˜ μˆ˜ν‰ μƒνƒœλ‘œλΆ€ν„° μ‹œκ³„λ°©ν–₯ λ˜λŠ” λ°˜μ‹œκ³„λ°©ν–₯으둜 νšŒμ „λ  수 μžˆλ‹€.As shown in FIG. 2 , the display 110 may be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise from the horizontal state of the L position shown in FIG. 1 .

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λŠ”, 도 1의 μˆ˜ν‰ μƒνƒœλ‘œλΆ€ν„° μ†Œμ • 각도, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄ 90λ„μ˜ νšŒμ „μ— κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬, 도 3에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, P μœ„μΉ˜μ—μ„œ μŠ€νƒ λ“œ(100)에 λŒ€ν•˜μ—¬ μ„Έλ‘œ λ°©ν–₯으둜 배열될 수 μžˆλ‹€.In one embodiment, the display 110 is positioned longitudinally relative to the stand 100 in the P position, as shown in FIG. 3 , based on a rotation of an angle, eg, 90 degrees, from the horizontal state of FIG. 1 . can be arranged.

볡수의 ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλŠ”, 도 3에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)κ°€ μ„Έλ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 배치된 μƒνƒœμ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” μ„Έλ‘œλͺ¨λ“œ(portrait mode) λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. μ„Έλ‘œλͺ¨λ“œμ—μ„œ, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λŠ” μŠ€νƒ λ“œ(100)에 λŒ€ν•΄ 수직으둜 μœ„μΉ˜ν•˜λ©°, μ’…νš‘λΉ„λ‘œμ„œ μ„Έλ‘œκΈΈμ΄κ°€ κ°€λ‘œκΈΈμ΄ 보닀 κΈ΄ 화면을 κ°€μ§€κ²Œ λœλ‹€.The plurality of screen modes may include a portrait mode corresponding to a state in which the display 110 is vertically arranged, as shown in FIG. 3 . In the portrait mode, the display 110 is positioned vertically with respect to the stand 100 , and has a screen whose vertical length is longer than the horizontal length as an aspect ratio.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ”, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 νšŒμ „μ— μ˜ν•΄ 볡수의 ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œ 즉, κ°€λ‘œλͺ¨λ“œμ™€ μ„Έλ‘œλͺ¨λ“œκ°€ μƒν˜Έ μ „ν™˜ κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜λ„λ‘ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the electronic device 1 may be implemented such that a plurality of screen modes, ie, a landscape mode and a portrait mode, are interchangeable by rotation of the display 110 .

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œκ°€ μ„Έλ‘œλͺ¨λ“œμΈ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λŠ”, μ„Έλ‘œλͺ¨λ“œλ‘œ μ œμž‘λœ μ˜μƒ, λ‹€μ‹œ 말해, 슀마트폰의 화면을 μ„Έλ‘œλ‘œ ν•œ μƒνƒœμ—μ„œ μ΄¬μ˜ν•˜μ—¬ μ œμž‘λœ μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό ν’€ 슀크린으둜 ν‘œμ‹œν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.According to an embodiment, the display 110 in which the screen mode is a portrait mode may display an image produced in a portrait mode, that is, content produced by shooting a smartphone screen in a vertical state in a full screen.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, 볡수의 ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλŠ” κ°€λ‘œλͺ¨λ“œμ™€ μ„Έλ‘œλͺ¨λ“œλΏ μ•„λ‹ˆλΌ, 도 2에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)κ°€ μ†Œμ • 각도, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄ 45도, κΈ°μšΈμ–΄μ§„ λŒ€κ°μ„ λͺ¨λ“œλ₯Ό 더 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. λŒ€κ°μ„ λͺ¨λ“œλŠ” λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)κ°€ κΈ°μšΈμ–΄μ§„ λ°©ν–₯, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄ 쒌츑 λ˜λŠ” 우츑, 및 κΈ°μšΈμ–΄μ§„ 각도, λ‹€μ‹œ 말해, κΈ°μšΈκΈ°μ— 따라 볡수 개일 수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the plurality of screen modes may further include a diagonal mode in which the display 110 is inclined at a predetermined angle, for example, 45 degrees, as shown in FIG. 2 , as well as a landscape mode and a portrait mode. . The diagonal mode may be plural according to a direction in which the display 110 is inclined, for example, left or right, and an inclined angle, that is, inclination.

λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯치(1)μ—λŠ”, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λ₯Ό νšŒμ „μ‹œν‚€κΈ° μœ„ν•œ 동λ ₯을 μ œκ³΅ν•˜λŠ” ꡬ동뢀(150)κ°€ 마련될 수 μžˆλ‹€. In the electronic device 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention, a driving unit 150 that provides power for rotating the display 110 may be provided.

λ‹€λ§Œ, λ³Έ 발λͺ… μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 κ΅¬ν˜„ ν˜•νƒœλŠ”, 도 1 λ‚΄μ§€ 도 3에 λ„μ‹œλœ ν˜•νƒœμ— ν•œμ •λ˜μ§€ μ•ŠλŠ”λ‹€. 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” μŠ€νƒ λ“œ(100)λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜μ§€ μ•ŠμœΌλ©°, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)κ°€ νšŒμ „ κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜κ²Œ 벽면에 μ„€μΉ˜λ˜λŠ” ν˜•νƒœλ‘œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€.However, the implementation form of the electronic device 1 of the present invention is not limited to the form shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 . For example, the electronic device 1 does not include the stand 100 , and the display 110 may be rotatably installed on a wall surface.

λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” μ™ΈλΆ€μ˜ μ‹ ν˜Έκ³΅κΈ‰μ› 즉, μ†ŒμŠ€λ‘œλΆ€ν„° μ œκ³΅λ˜λŠ” μ‹ ν˜Έ, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄ μ»¨ν…νŠΈμ— κ΄€ν•œ 데이터λ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹ ν•˜κ³ , μˆ˜μ‹ λœ μ»¨ν…νŠΈ 데이터λ₯Ό κΈ° μ„€μ •λœ ν”„λ‘œμ„ΈμŠ€μ— 따라 μ²˜λ¦¬ν•˜μ—¬ μ˜μƒμœΌλ‘œ ν‘œμ‹œλ˜λ„λ‘ ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.The electronic device 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention receives a signal provided from an external signal source, that is, a source, for example, data related to content, and processes the received content data according to a preset process into an image. can be displayed.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ”, 도 1 λ‚΄μ§€ 도 3에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, μ˜μƒμ„ ν‘œμ‹œν•  수 μžˆλŠ” λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)κ°€ 마련된 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μž₯μΉ˜λ‘œμ„œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€. κ·ΈλŸ¬λ‚˜, μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 κ΅¬ν˜„ ν˜•νƒœλŠ” ν•œμ •λ˜λŠ” 것이 μ•„λ‹ˆλ―€λ‘œ, λ‹€λ₯Έ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆλ‘œμ„œ, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ”, μ—°κ²°λœ λ³„λ„μ˜ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ‘œ μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μ „μ†‘ν•˜λŠ” μ…‹νƒ‘λ°•μŠ€μ™€ 같은 μ˜μƒμ²˜λ¦¬μž₯μΉ˜λ‘œμ„œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  μˆ˜λ„ μžˆλ‹€. In an embodiment, the electronic device 1 may be implemented as a display device provided with a display 110 capable of displaying an image, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 . However, since the implementation form of the electronic device 1 is not limited, as another embodiment, the electronic device 1 may be implemented as an image processing device such as a set-top box that transmits a signal to a separate connected display. .

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μž₯치둜 κ΅¬ν˜„λœ μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” λ°©μ†‘κ΅­μ˜ μ†‘μΆœμž₯λΉ„λ‘œλΆ€ν„° μˆ˜μ‹ λ˜λŠ” λ°©μ†‘μ‹ ν˜Έ, 방솑정보, λ˜λŠ” 방솑데이터 쀑 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ— κΈ°μ΄ˆν•œ 방솑 μ˜μƒμ„ μ²˜λ¦¬ν•  수 μžˆλŠ” ν…”λ ˆλΉ„μ „(TV)으둜 κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€. 이 경우, μ „μžμž₯치(1)μ—λŠ” λ°©μ†‘μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό 채널 λ³„λ‘œ νŠœλ‹ν•˜κΈ° μœ„ν•œ νŠœλ„ˆκ°€ 마련될 수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the electronic device 1 implemented as a display device may be implemented as a television (TV) capable of processing a broadcast image based on at least one of a broadcast signal received from a transmission device of a broadcast station, broadcast information, or broadcast data. can In this case, the electronic device 1 may be provided with a tuner for tuning a broadcast signal for each channel.

μ „μžμž₯치(1)κ°€ ν…”λ ˆλΉ„μ „μΈ 경우, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” 직접 λ˜λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치(1)와 케이블 등에 μ˜ν•΄ 연결될 수 μžˆλŠ” λΆ€κ°€κΈ°κΈ°, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, μ…‹νƒ‘λ°•μŠ€(set-top box, STB), OC λ°•μŠ€(one-connect box), λ―Έλ””μ–΄λ°•μŠ€ 등을 톡해 λ°©μ†‘κ΅­μ˜ μ†‘μΆœμž₯λΉ„λ‘œλΆ€ν„° μˆ˜μ‹ λ˜λŠ” λ°©μ†‘μ‹ ν˜Έ, 방솑정보, λ˜λŠ” 방솑데이터 쀑 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ— κΈ°μ΄ˆν•œ 방솑 μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹ ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. μ—¬κΈ°μ„œ, μ „μžμž₯치(1)와 λΆ€κ°€κΈ°κΈ°μ˜ μ—°κ²° 방식은 케이블에 ν•œμ •λ˜λŠ” 것은 μ•„λ‹ˆλ©°, λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ μœ λ¬΄μ„  μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€κ°€ 적용될 수 μžˆλ‹€.When the electronic device 1 is a television, the electronic device 1 is an additional device that can be directly or connected to the electronic device 1 by a cable, for example, a set-top box (STB), an OC box. It is possible to receive broadcast content based on at least one of a broadcast signal, broadcast information, or broadcast data received from a transmission device of a broadcast station through a one-connect box, a media box, or the like. Here, the connection method between the electronic device 1 and the additional device is not limited to a cable, and various wired/wireless interfaces may be applied.

μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ”, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄ λ°©μ†‘κ΅­μœΌλ‘œλΆ€ν„° μ†‘μΆœλ˜λŠ” RF(radio frequency) μ‹ ν˜Έ 즉, 방솑 μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό λ¬΄μ„ μœΌλ‘œ μˆ˜μ‹ ν•  수 있으며, 이λ₯Ό μœ„ν•΄ μ „μžμž₯치(1)μ—λŠ” μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹ ν•  수 μžˆλŠ” μ•ˆν…Œλ‚˜κ°€ 마련될 수 μžˆλ‹€.The electronic device 1 may wirelessly receive, for example, a radio frequency (RF) signal transmitted from a broadcasting station, that is, broadcast content, and for this purpose, the electronic device 1 may be provided with an antenna capable of receiving the signal. can

μ „μžμž₯치(1)μ—μ„œ, 방솑 μ»¨ν…νŠΈλŠ” μ§€μƒνŒŒ, 케이블, μœ„μ„± 등을 ν†΅ν•΄μ„œ μˆ˜μ‹  κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜λ©°, μ‹ ν˜Έκ³΅κΈ‰μ›, 즉, μ†ŒμŠ€λŠ” 방솑ꡭ에 ν•œμ •λ˜μ§€ μ•ŠλŠ”λ‹€. 즉, λ°μ΄ν„°μ˜ μ†‘μˆ˜μ‹ μ΄ κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ μž₯치 λ˜λŠ” μŠ€ν…Œμ΄μ…˜μ΄λΌλ©΄ λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ˜ μ†ŒμŠ€μ— 포함될 수 μžˆλ‹€.In the electronic device 1, broadcast content can be received through a terrestrial wave, cable, satellite, or the like, and a signal source, ie, a source, is not limited to a broadcasting station. That is, any device or station capable of transmitting and receiving data may be included in the source of the present invention.

μ „μžμž₯치(1)μ—μ„œ μˆ˜μ‹ λ˜λŠ” μ‹ ν˜Έμ˜ κ·œκ²©μ€ μž₯치의 κ΅¬ν˜„ ν˜•νƒœμ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ λ°©μ‹μœΌλ‘œ ꡬ성될 수 있으며, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” ν›„μˆ ν•˜λŠ” μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(도 4의 120)의 κ΅¬ν˜„ ν˜•νƒœμ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬, HDMI(High Definition Multimedia Interface), HDMI-CEC(Consumer Electronics Control), λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄ 포트(display port, DP), DVI, μ»΄ν¬μ§€νŠΈ(composite) λΉ„λ””μ˜€, μ»΄ν¬λ„ŒνŠΈ(component) λΉ„λ””μ˜€, 슈퍼 λΉ„λ””μ˜€(super video), DVI(Digital Visual Interface), μ¬λ”λ³ΌνŠΈ(Thunderbolt), RGB 케이블, SCART(Syndicat des Constructeurs d'Appareils Radiorecepteurs et Televiseurs), USB(universal serial bus) λ“±μ˜ κ·œκ²©μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μ˜μƒ μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ‘œμ„œ μœ μ„ μœΌλ‘œ μˆ˜μ‹ ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.The standard of the signal received by the electronic device 1 may be configured in various ways in response to the implementation form of the device, and the electronic device 1 corresponds to the implementation form of the interface unit (120 in FIG. 4 ) to be described later, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface), HDMI-CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), display port (DP), DVI, composite video, component video, super video, DVI (Digital) Visual Interface), Thunderbolt, RGB cable, SCART (Syndicat des Constructeurs d'Appareils Radiorecepteurs et Televiseurs), and USB (universal serial bus) signals can be received as video content by wire.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” 슀마트 TV λ˜λŠ” IP TV(Internet Protocol TV)둜 κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€. 슀마트 TVλŠ” μ‹€μ‹œκ°„μœΌλ‘œ λ°©μ†‘μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹ ν•˜μ—¬ ν‘œμ‹œν•  수 있고, μ›Ή λΈŒλΌμš°μ§• κΈ°λŠ₯을 κ°€μ§€κ³  μžˆμ–΄ μ‹€μ‹œκ°„ λ°©μ†‘μ‹ ν˜Έμ˜ ν‘œμ‹œμ™€ λ™μ‹œμ— 인터넷을 ν†΅ν•˜μ—¬ λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ μ»¨ν…νŠΈ 검색 및 μ†ŒλΉ„κ°€ κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜κ³  이λ₯Ό μœ„ν•˜μ—¬ νŽΈλ¦¬ν•œ μ‚¬μš©μž ν™˜κ²½μ„ μ œκ³΅ν•  수 μžˆλŠ” TV이닀. λ˜ν•œ, 슀마트 TVλŠ” κ°œλ°©ν˜• μ†Œν”„νŠΈμ›¨μ–΄ ν”Œλž«νΌμ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜κ³  μžˆμ–΄ μ‚¬μš©μžμ—κ²Œ μ–‘λ°©ν–₯ μ„œλΉ„μŠ€λ₯Ό μ œκ³΅ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. λ”°λΌμ„œ, 슀마트 TVλŠ” κ°œλ°©ν˜• μ†Œν”„νŠΈμ›¨μ–΄ ν”Œλž«νΌμ„ ν†΅ν•˜μ—¬ λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ μ»¨ν…νŠΈ, 예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄ μ†Œμ •μ˜ μ„œλΉ„μŠ€λ₯Ό μ œκ³΅ν•˜λŠ” μ–΄ν”Œλ¦¬μΌ€μ΄μ…˜μ˜ μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό μ‚¬μš©μžμ—κ²Œ μ œκ³΅ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. μ΄λŸ¬ν•œ μ–΄ν”Œλ¦¬μΌ€μ΄μ…˜μ€ λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ μ’…λ₯˜μ˜ μ„œλΉ„μŠ€λ₯Ό μ œκ³΅ν•  수 μžˆλŠ” μ‘μš© ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨μœΌλ‘œμ„œ, 예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄ SNS, 금육, λ‰΄μŠ€, 날씨, 지도, μŒμ•…, μ˜ν™”, κ²Œμž„, μ „μž μ±… λ“±μ˜ μ„œλΉ„μŠ€λ₯Ό μ œκ³΅ν•˜λŠ” μ–΄ν”Œλ¦¬μΌ€μ΄μ…˜μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•œλ‹€.In an embodiment, the electronic device 1 may be implemented as a smart TV or Internet Protocol TV (IP TV). A smart TV can receive and display broadcast signals in real time, and has a web browsing function, so it is possible to search and consume various contents through the Internet at the same time as displaying real-time broadcast signals, and to provide a convenient user environment for this. am. In addition, since the smart TV includes an open software platform, it can provide interactive services to users. Accordingly, the smart TV can provide a user with various contents, for example, the contents of an application providing a predetermined service through an open software platform. These applications are applications that can provide various types of services, and include, for example, applications that provide services such as SNS, finance, news, weather, maps, music, movies, games, and e-books.

κ·ΈλŸ¬λ‚˜, λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ˜ 사상이 μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 κ΅¬ν˜„ μ˜ˆμ‹œμ— ν•œμ •λ˜μ§€ μ•ŠλŠ” λ°”, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” TV 이외에도 μ˜μƒμ„ 처리 κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ μ’…λ₯˜μ˜ κ΅¬ν˜„ μ˜ˆμ‹œ 예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, λ°μŠ€ν¬νƒ‘(desktop) λ˜λŠ” λž©νƒ‘(laptop)κ³Ό 같은 컴퓨터(personal computer, PC)의 λͺ¨λ‹ˆν„°μ—λ„ 적용될 수 μžˆλ‹€. λ‹€λ₯Έ μ˜ˆλ‘œμ„œ, λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ˜ μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” 슀마트폰(smart phone), νƒœλΈ”λ¦Ώ(tablet)κ³Ό 같은 μŠ€λ§ˆνŠΈνŒ¨λ“œ(smart pad) 등을 ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” 볡수의 ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ₯Ό μ „ν™˜ν•˜μ—¬ λ™μž‘ν•  수 μžˆλŠ” λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄κ°€ 마련된 단말μž₯치(terminal)λ‘œμ„œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  μˆ˜λ„ μžˆλ‹€.However, the spirit of the present invention is not limited to the implementation examples of the electronic device 1, and the electronic device 1 includes various types of implementation examples capable of processing images in addition to the TV, for example, a desktop or a laptop. ) can also be applied to the monitor of a personal computer (PC). As another example, the electronic device 1 of the present invention is provided with a display capable of operating by switching a plurality of screen modes including a smart pad such as a smart phone or a tablet. It may be implemented as a terminal device.

μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” λ‚΄λΆ€/μ™ΈλΆ€μ˜ μ €μž₯맀체에 μ €μž₯된 μ‹ ν˜Έ/데이터에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•œ λ™μ˜μƒ, μ •μ§€μ˜μƒ, μ–΄ν”Œλ¦¬μΌ€μ΄μ…˜(application), OSD(on-screen display), λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ λ™μž‘ μ œμ–΄λ₯Ό μœ„ν•œ μœ μ € μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€(user interface, UI) 등을 화면에 ν‘œμ‹œν•˜λ„λ‘ μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μ²˜λ¦¬ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. The electronic device 1 includes a user interface (UI) for controlling video, still image, application, on-screen display (OSD), and various operations based on signals/data stored in internal/external storage media. The signal can be processed to display the back on the screen.

μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” μ»¨ν…νŠΈ μ œκ³΅μ„ μœ„ν•œ μ†ŒμŠ€λ‘œμ„œ, μ„œλ²„, 단말μž₯치λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•œ λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ μ™ΈλΆ€μž₯μΉ˜λ“€λ‘œλΆ€ν„° μœ μ„  λ˜λŠ” 무선 λ„€νŠΈμ›Œν¬ 톡신에 μ˜ν•΄ μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό μ œκ³΅λ°›μ„ 수 있으며, ν†΅μ‹ μ˜ μ’…λ₯˜λŠ” ν•œμ •λ˜μ§€ μ•ŠλŠ”λ‹€.As a source for providing content, the electronic device 1 may receive content from various external devices including a server and a terminal device through wired or wireless network communication, and the type of communication is not limited.

ꡬ체적으둜, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” ν›„μˆ ν•˜λŠ” μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(120)의 κ΅¬ν˜„ ν˜•νƒœμ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ μ™€μ΄νŒŒμ΄(Wi-Fi), μ™€μ΄νŒŒμ΄ λ‹€μ΄λ ‰νŠΈ(Wi-Fi Direct), λΈ”λ£¨νˆ¬μŠ€(bluetooth), λΈ”λ£¨νˆ¬μŠ€ μ €μ—λ„ˆμ§€(bluetooth low energy), μ§€κ·ΈλΉ„(Zigbee), UWB(Ultra-Wideband), NFC(Near Field Communication) λ“±μ˜ κ·œκ²©μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μ˜μƒ μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ‘œμ„œ 무선 λ„€νŠΈμ›Œν¬ 톡신을 톡해 μˆ˜μ‹ ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. λ˜ν•œ, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” 이더넷(Ethernet) λ“±κ³Ό 같은 μœ μ„  λ„€νŠΈμ›Œν¬ 톡신을 톡해 μ»¨ν…νŠΈ μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹ ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.Specifically, the electronic device 1 corresponds to an implementation form of the interface unit 120 to be described later, such as Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Direct, Bluetooth, and Bluetooth low energy. , Zigbee (Zigbee), UWB (Ultra-Wideband), NFC (Near Field Communication), etc. a signal corresponding to the standard may be received as video content through wireless network communication. Also, the electronic device 1 may receive a content signal through wired network communication such as Ethernet.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ μ„œλ²„λŠ” μœ μ„  λ˜λŠ” 무선 λ„€νŠΈμ›Œν¬λ₯Ό 톡해 μ „μžμž₯치(1)λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•œ λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ 기기둜 μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό 전솑할 μˆ˜λŠ” μ»¨ν…νŠΈ ν”„λ‘œλ°”μ΄λ”λ‘œμ„œ 마련될 수 μžˆλ‹€. 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, μ„œλ²„λŠ” VOD(video on demand)와 같은 λ―Έλ””μ–΄νŒŒμΌμ΄λ‚˜ μ›Ήμ»¨ν…νŠΈ 등을 μ‹€μ‹œκ°„ 슀트리밍 λ°©μ‹μœΌλ‘œ μ œκ³΅ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the server may be provided as a content provider capable of transmitting content to various devices including the electronic device 1 through a wired or wireless network. For example, the server may provide a media file such as video on demand (VOD) or web content in a real-time streaming method.

λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, μ„œλ²„λŠ” 볡수 개 마련될 수 μžˆλ‹€. 이 경우, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” 볡수의 μ„œλ²„ 각각에 μ ‘μ†ν•¨μœΌλ‘œμ¨, μ ‘μ†λœ 각 μ„œλ²„λ‘œλΆ€ν„° λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό μ œκ³΅λ°›λ„λ‘ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€. In an embodiment of the present invention, a plurality of servers may be provided. In this case, the electronic device 1 may be implemented to receive various contents from each of the connected servers by accessing each of the plurality of servers.

μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ”, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, 유튜브(YouTube)와 같은 μ›Ήμ„œλ²„λ‚˜, λ„·ν”Œλ¦­μŠ€(Netflix)와 같은 OTT(over the top) μ„œλΉ„μŠ€λ₯Ό μ œκ³΅ν•  수 μžˆλŠ” OTT μ„œλ²„λ‘œλΆ€ν„° VOD와 같은 λ―Έλ””μ–΄ μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹ ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.The electronic device 1 may receive media content such as VOD from, for example, a web server such as YouTube or an OTT server capable of providing an over the top (OTT) service such as Netflix. can

μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” μ»¨ν…νŠΈ μž¬μƒμ„ μœ„ν•œ μ–΄ν”Œλ¦¬μΌ€μ΄μ…˜, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄ VOD μ–΄ν”Œλ¦¬μΌ€μ΄μ…˜μ„ μ‹€ν–‰ν•˜μ—¬, μ„œλ²„λ‘œλΆ€ν„° μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹  및 κ·Έ μˆ˜μ‹ ν•œ μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό μ²˜λ¦¬ν•¨μœΌλ‘œμ¨, ν•΄λ‹Ή μ»¨ν…νŠΈμ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” μ˜μƒμ΄ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λ₯Ό 톡해 좜λ ₯ 즉, ν‘œμ‹œλ˜λ„λ‘ ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. μ—¬κΈ°μ„œ, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” μ‹€ν–‰λœ μ–΄ν”Œλ¦¬μΌ€μ΄μ…˜μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” μ‚¬μš©μž 계정을 μ΄μš©ν•˜μ—¬ μ„œλ²„λ‘œλΆ€ν„° μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹ ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.The electronic device 1 executes an application for content reproduction, for example, a VOD application, receives content from a server, and processes the received content, so that an image corresponding to the content is output through the display 110, that is, , can be displayed. Here, the electronic device 1 may receive content from the server using a user account corresponding to the executed application.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, 단말μž₯μΉ˜λŠ” 슀마트폰(smart phone), νƒœλΈ”λ¦Ώ(tablet)κ³Ό 같은 μŠ€λ§ˆνŠΈνŒ¨λ“œ(smart pad) 등을 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. In an embodiment, the terminal device may include a smart phone, a smart pad such as a tablet, and the like.

μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” 무선톡신에 μ˜ν•΄ μ—°κ²°λœ 단말μž₯μΉ˜λ‘œλΆ€ν„°, 이λ₯Έλ°” ν™”λ©΄ 미러링(screen mirroring)에 μ˜ν•΄, μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹ ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. λ‹€μ‹œ 말해, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ”, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, 슀마트폰과 같은 단말μž₯치의 ν™”λ©΄μ—μ„œ ν‘œμ‹œλ˜λŠ” μ»¨ν…νŠΈμ˜ μ˜μƒμ„ μ œκ³΅λ°›μ•„ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λ₯Ό 톡해 좜λ ₯ν•¨μœΌλ‘œμ¨, ν™”λ©΄ 미러링 λ™μž‘μ„ μˆ˜ν–‰ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.The electronic device 1 may receive content from a terminal device connected by wireless communication, so-called screen mirroring. In other words, the electronic device 1 may perform a screen mirroring operation by receiving an image of content displayed on the screen of a terminal device such as a smart phone and outputting it through the display 110 .

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ μ „μžμž₯치(1)와 단말μž₯치 κ°„ μ»¨ν…νŠΈμ˜ 전솑은, 단말μž₯μΉ˜κ°€ 디코더에 μ˜ν•΄ λ””μ½”λ”©λœ μƒνƒœμ˜ μ»¨ν…νŠΈμ˜ 데이터λ₯Ό μ „μžμž₯치(1)둜 μ „μ†‘ν•˜λŠ” 미러링 방식에 μ˜ν•΄ μˆ˜ν–‰λ  수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the transmission of content between the electronic device 1 and the terminal device may be performed by a mirroring method in which the terminal device transmits data of the content decoded by the decoder to the electronic device 1 .

λ‹€λ§Œ, λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ—μ„œ μ „μžμž₯치(1)와 단말μž₯치 κ°„ μ»¨ν…νŠΈμ˜ 전솑은 μ „μˆ ν•œ 바에 ν•œμ •λ˜μ§€ μ•Šκ³ , λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ 방식이 적용될 수 μžˆλ‹€. 즉, λ‹€λ₯Έ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆλ‘œμ„œ, λ””μ½”λ”©λ˜μ§€ μ•Šμ€ μ»¨ν…νŠΈμ˜ 데이터, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, μ»¨ν…νŠΈμ˜ μ£Όμ†Œ 정보λ₯Ό μ „μ†‘ν•˜λŠ” 캐슀트(cast) 방식에 μ˜ν•΄ μˆ˜ν–‰λ  수 μžˆλ‹€. 캐슀트 λ°©μ‹μ—μ„œλŠ”, μ»¨ν…νŠΈκ°€ μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 디코더에 μ˜ν•΄ λ””μ½”λ”©λ˜μ–΄ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)에 ν‘œμ‹œλ  수 μžˆλ‹€.However, in the present invention, the transmission of content between the electronic device 1 and the terminal device is not limited to the above description, and various methods may be applied. That is, as another embodiment, data of undecoded content, for example, may be performed by a cast method of transmitting address information of the content. In the cast method, the content may be decoded by the decoder of the electronic device 1 and displayed on the display 110 .

즉, λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ—μ„œ 단말μž₯μΉ˜μ—μ„œ ν‘œμ‹œλ˜λŠ” μ»¨ν…νŠΈμ˜ μ˜μƒμ„ μ „μžμž₯치(1)λ₯Ό 톡해 μ œκ³΅ν•˜λŠ” ν™”λ©΄ λ―ΈλŸ¬λ§μ„ μˆ˜ν–‰ν•˜λŠ”λ° μžˆμ–΄, κ·Έ μ»¨ν…νŠΈμ˜ 전솑은 미러링 λ˜λŠ” 캐슀트 쀑 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.That is, in performing screen mirroring in which an image of content displayed on a terminal device is provided through the electronic device 1 in the present invention, transmission of the content may include at least one of mirroring and casting.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” 방솑ꡭ, μ„œλ²„, 단말μž₯치 등을 ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” 볡수의 μ†ŒμŠ€λ‘œλΆ€ν„° μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό μ œκ³΅λ°›μ„ 수 μžˆλ‹€. λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)μ—λŠ” μ‚¬μš©μžμ— μ˜ν•΄ 선택 κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜λ©°, 볡수의 μ†ŒμŠ€μ— 각각 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UIκ°€ ν‘œμ‹œλ  수 μžˆλ‹€. μ‚¬μš©μžκ°€ ν‘œμ‹œλœ UIμ—μ„œ μ–΄λŠ ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ μ„ νƒν•˜λ©΄, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” μ„ νƒλœ 메뉴항λͺ©μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” μ†ŒμŠ€λ‘œλΆ€ν„° μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹ ν•˜κ³ , 그에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•œ μ˜μƒμ΄ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λ₯Ό 톡해 ν‘œμ‹œλ  수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the electronic device 1 may receive content from a plurality of sources including a broadcasting station, a server, a terminal device, and the like. The display 110 may display a UI that is selectable by a user and includes a plurality of menu items respectively corresponding to a plurality of sources. When the user selects any one menu item in the displayed UI, the electronic device 1 may receive content from a source corresponding to the selected menu item, and an image based thereon may be displayed through the display 110 .

μ΄ν•˜, 도면을 μ°Έμ‘°ν•˜μ—¬, λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯치의 ꡬ성듀에 λŒ€ν•΄ μ„€λͺ…ν•˜κΈ°λ‘œ ν•œλ‹€.Hereinafter, configurations of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

도 4λŠ” λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— μ˜ν•œ μ „μžμž₯치의 ꡬ성을 λ„μ‹œν•œ 블둝도이닀.4 is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

λ‹€λ§Œ, 도 4에 λ„μ‹œλœ λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ˜ 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— μ˜ν•œ μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 ꡬ성은 ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ μ˜ˆμ‹œμΌ 뿐이며, λ‹€λ₯Έ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— μ˜ν•œ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜λŠ” 도 4에 λ„μ‹œλœ ꡬ성 외에 λ‹€λ₯Έ κ΅¬μ„±μœΌλ‘œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€. 즉, λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ˜ μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” 도 4에 λ„μ‹œλœ ꡬ성 μ™Έ λ‹€λ₯Έ ꡬ성이 μΆ”κ°€λ˜κ±°λ‚˜, ν˜Ήμ€ 도 4에 λ„μ‹œλœ ꡬ성 쀑 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜κ°€ 배제된 ν˜•νƒœλ‘œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€. λ˜ν•œ, λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ˜ μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ”, 도 4에 κ΅¬μ„±λœ κ΅¬μ„±μ˜ 일뢀가 λ³€κ²½λ˜λŠ” ν˜•νƒœλ‘œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  μˆ˜λ„ μžˆλ‹€.However, the configuration of the electronic device 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention shown in FIG. 4 is only an example, and the electronic device according to another embodiment may be implemented in a configuration other than the configuration shown in FIG. 4 . have. That is, the electronic device 1 of the present invention may be implemented in a form in which a configuration other than the configuration shown in FIG. 4 is added or at least one of the configuration shown in FIG. 4 is excluded. In addition, the electronic device 1 of the present invention may be implemented in a form in which a part of the configuration configured in FIG. 4 is changed.

λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ”, 도 4에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The electronic device 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention may include a display 110 as shown in FIG. 4 .

λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λŠ” μ˜μƒμ„ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.The display 110 may display an image.

λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 κ΅¬ν˜„ 방식은 ν•œμ •λ˜μ§€ μ•ŠμœΌλ©°, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄ μ•‘μ •(liquid crystal), ν”ŒλΌμ¦ˆλ§ˆ(plasma), λ°œκ΄‘ λ‹€μ΄μ˜€λ“œ(light-emitting diode), μœ κΈ°λ°œκ΄‘ λ‹€μ΄μ˜€λ“œ(organic light-emitting diode), 면전도 μ „μžμ΄(surface-conduction electron-emitter), νƒ„μ†Œ λ‚˜λ…Έ 튜브(carbon nano-tube), λ‚˜λ…Έ ν¬λ¦¬μŠ€νƒˆ(nano-crystal) λ“±μ˜ λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄ λ°©μ‹μœΌλ‘œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€. 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λŠ” μ˜μƒμ„ ν‘œμ‹œν•˜λŠ” λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄ νŒ¨λ„μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λ©°, κ·Έ κ΅¬ν˜„ 방식에 λ”°λΌμ„œ 뢀가적인 ꡬ성, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄ ꡬ동뢀(driver)λ₯Ό 더 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The implementation method of the display 110 is not limited, and for example, liquid crystal, plasma, light-emitting diode, organic light-emitting diode, surface conduction electron gun ( It can be implemented in various display methods such as surface-conduction electron-emitter), carbon nano-tube, and nano-crystal. In an embodiment, the display 110 includes a display panel for displaying an image, and may further include an additional component, for example, a driver according to an implementation method thereof.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)μ—λŠ” μ†ŒμŠ€λ‘œλΆ€ν„° μˆ˜μ‹ ν•œ μ»¨ν…νŠΈμ˜ μ˜μƒμ΄ ν‘œμ‹œλ  수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, an image of content received from a source may be displayed on the display 110 .

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)μ—λŠ” μ‚¬μš©μžμ— μ˜ν•΄ 선택 κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UIκ°€ ν‘œμ‹œλ  수 μžˆλ‹€. 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ€ μ‹œκ°μ  ν˜•μƒμ„ κ°€μ§€λŠ” 문자 λ˜λŠ” κ·Έλž˜ν”½μ˜ μ•„μ΄μ½˜μœΌλ‘œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, a UI including a plurality of menu items selectable by a user may be displayed on the display 110 . The plurality of menu items may be implemented as text or graphic icons having a visual shape.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, UI의 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ€ μ†Œμ • λ°©ν–₯, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, κ°€λ‘œ, μ„Έλ‘œ, λŒ€κ°μ„  λ“±μœΌλ‘œ λ°°μ—΄λ˜μ–΄ ν‘œμ‹œν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. λ‹€λ₯Έ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, UI의 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ€ 각각이 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 ν™”λ©΄μ—μ„œ λΆ€μœ ν•˜λŠ” μž…μž, 즉, νŒŒν‹°ν΄(particle) ν˜•νƒœλ‘œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the plurality of menu items of the UI may be arranged and displayed in a predetermined direction, for example, horizontally, vertically, or diagonally. In another embodiment, each of the plurality of menu items of the UI may be implemented in the form of particles floating on the screen of the display 110 , that is, particles.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” UI에 λŒ€ν•œ λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 μ‹λ³„ν•˜κ³ , λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 화면에 κ·Έ μ‹λ³„λœ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ λ°°μ—΄λ˜λ„λ‘ ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the electronic device 1 identifies the arrangement direction of the UI based on the direction identification condition information for the UI, and a plurality of menu items corresponding to the identified arrangement direction of the UI on the screen of the display 110 . This can be arranged.

μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(120)λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The electronic device 1 may include an interface unit 120 .

μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(120)λŠ”, μ „μžμž₯치(1)κ°€ μ„œλ²„λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ μ™ΈλΆ€μ˜ μž₯μΉ˜μ™€ 톡신할 수 μžˆλ„λ‘ ν•œλ‹€.The interface unit 120 enables the electronic device 1 to communicate with various external devices including a server.

μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(120)λŠ” μœ μ„  μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(121)λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. μœ μ„  μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(121)λŠ” HDMI, HDMI-CEC, USB, μ»΄ν¬λ„ŒνŠΈ(Component), λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄ 포트(DP), DVI, μ¬λ”λ³ΌνŠΈ, RGB 케이블 λ“±μ˜ κ·œκ²©μ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ‹ ν˜Έ/데이터λ₯Ό 솑/μˆ˜μ‹ ν•˜λŠ” μ—°κ²°λΆ€λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. μ—¬κΈ°μ„œ, μœ μ„  μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(121)λŠ” 이듀 각각의 κ·œκ²©μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜ μ΄μƒμ˜ 컀λ„₯ν„°, λ‹¨μž λ˜λŠ” 포트λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The interface unit 120 may include a wired interface unit 121 . The wired interface unit 121 may include a connection unit for transmitting/receiving signals/data according to standards such as HDMI, HDMI-CEC, USB, Component, Display Port (DP), DVI, Thunderbolt, RGB cable, etc. can Here, the wired interface unit 121 may include at least one connector, terminal, or port corresponding to each of these standards.

μœ μ„  μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(121)λŠ” μ†ŒμŠ€ λ“±μœΌλ‘œλΆ€ν„° μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μž…λ ₯λ°›λŠ” μž…λ ₯ 포트λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” ν˜•νƒœλ‘œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ˜λ©°, κ²½μš°μ— 따라 좜λ ₯ 포트λ₯Ό 더 ν¬ν•¨ν•˜μ—¬ μ–‘λ°©ν–₯으둜 μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μ†‘μˆ˜μ‹  κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜κ²Œ 마련될 수 μžˆλ‹€.The wired interface unit 121 may be implemented in a form including an input port for receiving a signal from a source, and in some cases, may further include an output port to transmit/receive signals in both directions.

μœ μ„  μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(121)λŠ” μ§€μƒνŒŒ/μœ„μ„±λ°©μ†‘ λ“± λ°©μ†‘κ·œκ²©μ— λ”°λ₯Έ λ°©μ†‘μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹ ν•  수 μžˆλŠ” μ•ˆν…Œλ‚˜κ°€ μ—°κ²°λ˜κ±°λ‚˜, 케이블 방솑 κ·œκ²©μ— λ”°λ₯Έ λ°©μ†‘μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹ ν•  수 μžˆλŠ” 케이블이 연결될 수 μžˆλ„λ‘, HDMI 포트, DisplayPort, DVI 포트, μ¬λ”λ³ΌνŠΈ, μ»΄ν¬μ§€νŠΈ(composite) λΉ„λ””μ˜€, μ»΄ν¬λ„ŒνŠΈ(component) λΉ„λ””μ˜€, 슈퍼 λΉ„λ””μ˜€(super video), SCART λ“±κ³Ό 같이, λΉ„λ””μ˜€ 및/λ˜λŠ” μ˜€λ””μ˜€ μ „μ†‘κ·œκ²©μ— λ”°λ₯Έ 컀λ„₯ν„° λ˜λŠ” 포트 등을 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. λ‹€λ₯Έ μ˜ˆλ‘œμ„œ, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” λ°©μ†‘μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹ ν•  수 μžˆλŠ” μ•ˆν…Œλ‚˜λ₯Ό λ‚΄μž₯ν•  μˆ˜λ„ μžˆλ‹€.The wired interface unit 121 is configured to connect an antenna capable of receiving a broadcast signal according to a broadcasting standard such as terrestrial/satellite broadcasting, or a cable capable of receiving a broadcast signal according to the cable broadcasting standard to be connected, an HDMI port, a DisplayPort , DVI port, Thunderbolt, composite video, component video, super video, SCART, etc. may include a connector or port according to the video and / or audio transmission standard. As another example, the electronic device 1 may have a built-in antenna capable of receiving a broadcast signal.

μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(120)λ₯Ό 톡해 μˆ˜μ‹ ν•˜λŠ” λΉ„λ””μ˜€/μ˜€λ””μ˜€μ‹ ν˜Έκ°€ λ°©μ†‘μ‹ ν˜ΈμΈ 경우, μˆ˜μ‹ λœ λ°©μ†‘μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό 채널 λ³„λ‘œ νŠœλ‹ν•˜λŠ” νŠœλ„ˆ(tuner)λ₯Ό 더 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. νŠœλ„ˆλŠ” νŠœλ‹λœ νŠΉμ • μ±„λ„μ˜ λ°©μ†‘μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό λ³΅μ‘°ν•˜μ—¬ 트랜포트슀트림(transport stream, TS) ν˜•νƒœμ˜ μ‹ ν˜Έλ‘œ 좜λ ₯ν•˜λŠ” λ””λͺ¨λ“ˆλ ˆμ΄ν„°λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. λ‹€μ‹œ 말해, νŠœλ„ˆμ™€ λ””λͺ¨λ“ˆλ ˆμ΄ν„°λŠ” ν†΅ν•©λœ ν˜•νƒœμ˜ 단일 칩으둜 μ„€κ³„λ˜κ±°λ‚˜, μƒν˜Έ λΆ„λ¦¬λœ 2개의 칩으둜 각각 κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€.When the video/audio signal received through the interface unit 120 is a broadcast signal, the electronic device 1 may further include a tuner for tuning the received broadcast signal for each channel. The tuner may include a demodulator that demodulates a broadcast signal of a specific tuned channel and outputs a signal in the form of a transport stream (TS). In other words, the tuner and the demodulator may be designed as a single integrated chip, or may be implemented as two separate chips.

μœ μ„  μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(121)λŠ” USB 포트 λ“±κ³Ό 같은 λ²”μš© 데이터 μ „μ†‘κ·œκ²©μ— λ”°λ₯Έ 컀λ„₯ν„° λ˜λŠ” 포트 등을 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. μœ μ„  μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(121)λŠ” κ΄‘ μ „μ†‘κ·œκ²©μ— 따라 광케이블이 연결될 수 μžˆλŠ” 컀λ„₯ν„° λ˜λŠ” 포트 등을 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. μœ μ„  μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(121)λŠ” μ™ΈλΆ€ 마이크 λ˜λŠ” 마이크λ₯Ό κ΅¬λΉ„ν•œ μ™ΈλΆ€ μ˜€λ””μ˜€κΈ°κΈ°κ°€ μ—°κ²°λ˜λ©°, μ˜€λ””μ˜€κΈ°κΈ°λ‘œλΆ€ν„° μ˜€λ””μ˜€ μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹  λ˜λŠ” μž…λ ₯ν•  수 μžˆλŠ” 컀λ„₯ν„° λ˜λŠ” 포트 등을 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. μœ μ„  μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(121)λŠ” ν—€λ“œμ…‹, 이어폰, μ™ΈλΆ€ μŠ€ν”Όμ»€ λ“±κ³Ό 같은 μ˜€λ””μ˜€κΈ°κΈ°κ°€ μ—°κ²°λ˜λ©°, μ˜€λ””μ˜€κΈ°κΈ°λ‘œ μ˜€λ””μ˜€ μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό 전솑 λ˜λŠ” 좜λ ₯ν•  수 μžˆλŠ” 컀λ„₯ν„° λ˜λŠ” 포트 등을 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. μœ μ„  μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(121)λŠ” 이더넷(Ethernet) λ“±κ³Ό 같은 λ„€νŠΈμ›Œν¬ μ „μ†‘κ·œκ²©μ— λ”°λ₯Έ 컀λ„₯ν„° λ˜λŠ” 포트λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. μ˜ˆμ»¨λŒ€, μœ μ„  μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(121)λŠ” λΌμš°ν„° λ˜λŠ” κ²Œμ΄νŠΈμ›¨μ΄μ— μœ μ„  μ ‘μ†λœ λžœμΉ΄λ“œ λ“±μœΌλ‘œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€.The wired interface unit 121 may include a connector or port according to a universal data transmission standard such as a USB port. The wired interface unit 121 may include a connector or a port to which an optical cable can be connected according to an optical transmission standard. The wired interface unit 121 is connected to an external microphone or an external audio device having a microphone, and may include a connector or port capable of receiving or inputting an audio signal from the audio device. The wired interface unit 121 is connected to an audio device such as a headset, earphone, or external speaker, and may include a connector or port capable of transmitting or outputting an audio signal to the audio device. The wired interface unit 121 may include a connector or port according to a network transmission standard such as Ethernet. For example, the wired interface unit 121 may be implemented as a LAN card connected to a router or a gateway by wire.

μœ μ„  μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(121)λŠ” 컀λ„₯ν„° λ˜λŠ” 포트λ₯Ό 톡해 μ…‹νƒ‘λ°•μŠ€, κ΄‘ν•™λ―Έλ””μ–΄ μž¬μƒμž₯μΉ˜μ™€ 같은 μ™ΈλΆ€κΈ°κΈ°, λ˜λŠ” μ™ΈλΆ€ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μž₯μΉ˜λ‚˜, μŠ€ν”Όμ»€, μ„œλ²„ λ“±κ³Ό 1:1 λ˜λŠ” 1:N (N은 μžμ—°μˆ˜) λ°©μ‹μœΌλ‘œ μœ μ„  μ ‘μ†λ¨μœΌλ‘œμ¨, ν•΄λ‹Ή μ™ΈλΆ€κΈ°κΈ°λ‘œλΆ€ν„° λΉ„λ””μ˜€/μ˜€λ””μ˜€ μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹ ν•˜κ±°λ‚˜ λ˜λŠ” ν•΄λ‹Ή 외뢀기기에 λΉ„λ””μ˜€/μ˜€λ””μ˜€ μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μ†‘μ‹ ν•œλ‹€. μœ μ„  μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(121)λŠ”, λΉ„λ””μ˜€/μ˜€λ””μ˜€ μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό 각각 λ³„κ°œλ‘œ μ „μ†‘ν•˜λŠ” 컀λ„₯ν„° λ˜λŠ” 포트λ₯Ό 포함할 μˆ˜λ„ μžˆλ‹€.The wired interface unit 121 is connected to an external device such as a set-top box, an optical media player, or an external display device, a speaker, a server, and the like through a connector or port in a 1:1 or 1:N (N is a natural number) method. As a result, the video/audio signal is received from the corresponding external device or the video/audio signal is transmitted to the corresponding external device. The wired interface unit 121 may include a connector or a port for separately transmitting video/audio signals.

μœ μ„  μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(121)λŠ” λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ μ’…λ₯˜μ˜ 톡신 ν”„λ‘œν† μ½œμ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” 무선 톡신λͺ¨λ“ˆ(S/W module, chip λ“±)을 ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” ν†΅μ‹ νšŒλ‘œ(communication circuitry)λ‘œμ„œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€.The wired interface unit 121 may be implemented as a communication circuitry including a wireless communication module (S/W module, chip, etc.) corresponding to various types of communication protocols.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ μœ μ„  μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(121)λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치(1)에 λ‚΄μž₯λ˜λ‚˜, 동글(dongle) λ˜λŠ” λͺ¨λ“ˆ(module) ν˜•νƒœλ‘œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ˜μ–΄ μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 컀λ„₯터에 μ°©νƒˆλ  μˆ˜λ„ μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the wired interface unit 121 is embedded in the electronic device 1 , but may be implemented in the form of a dongle or a module to be detachably attached to the connector of the electronic device 1 .

μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(120)λŠ” 무선 μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(122)λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. The interface unit 120 may include a wireless interface unit 122 .

무선 μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(122)λŠ” 무선 μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(122)λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 κ΅¬ν˜„ ν˜•νƒœμ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ λ°©μ‹μœΌλ‘œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€. 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, 무선 μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(122)λŠ” ν†΅μ‹ λ°©μ‹μœΌλ‘œ RF(radio frequency), μ§€κ·ΈλΉ„(Zigbee), λΈ”λ£¨νˆ¬μŠ€(bluetooth), μ™€μ΄νŒŒμ΄(Wi-Fi), UWB(Ultra WideBand) 및 NFC(Near Field Communication) λ“± 무선톡신을 μ‚¬μš©ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.The wireless interface unit 122 may be implemented in various ways corresponding to the implementation form of the electronic device 1 . For example, the wireless interface unit 122 is a communication method such as RF (radio frequency), Zigbee (Zigbee), Bluetooth (bluetooth), Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi), UWB (Ultra WideBand) and NFC (Near Field Communication), etc. Wireless communication can be used.

무선 μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(122)λŠ” λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ μ’…λ₯˜μ˜ 톡신 ν”„λ‘œν† μ½œμ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” 무선 톡신λͺ¨λ“ˆ(S/W module, chip λ“±)을 ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” ν†΅μ‹ νšŒλ‘œ(communication circuitry)λ‘œμ„œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€.The wireless interface unit 122 may be implemented as a communication circuitry including a wireless communication module (S/W module, chip, etc.) corresponding to various types of communication protocols.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ 무선 μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(122)λŠ” λ¬΄μ„ λžœμœ λ‹›μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•œλ‹€. λ¬΄μ„ λžœμœ λ‹›μ€ ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)의 μ œμ–΄μ— 따라 μ–΅μ„ΈμŠ€ 포인트(access point, AP)λ₯Ό 톡해 λ¬΄μ„ μœΌλ‘œ μ™ΈλΆ€μž₯μΉ˜μ™€ 연결될 수 μžˆλ‹€. λ¬΄μ„ λžœμœ λ‹›μ€ μ™€μ΄νŒŒμ΄ λͺ¨λ“ˆμ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•œλ‹€.In an embodiment, the wireless interface unit 122 includes a wireless LAN unit. The wireless LAN unit may be wirelessly connected to an external device through an access point (AP) under the control of the processor 170 . The wireless LAN unit includes a WiFi module.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ 무선 μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(122)λŠ” μ–΅μ„ΈμŠ€ 포인트 없이 λ¬΄μ„ μœΌλ‘œ μ „μžμž₯치(1)와 μ™ΈλΆ€μž₯치 사이에 1 λŒ€ 1 λ‹€μ΄λ ‰νŠΈ 톡신을 μ§€μ›ν•˜λŠ” 무선톡신λͺ¨λ“ˆμ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•œλ‹€. 무선톡신λͺ¨λ“ˆμ€ μ™€μ΄νŒŒμ΄ λ‹€μ΄λ ‰νŠΈ, λΈ”λ£¨νˆ¬μŠ€, λΈ”λ£¨νˆ¬μŠ€ μ €μ—λ„ˆμ§€ λ“±μ˜ 톡신방식을 μ§€μ›ν•˜λ„λ‘ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€. μ „μžμž₯치(1)κ°€ μ™ΈλΆ€μž₯μΉ˜μ™€ λ‹€μ΄λ ‰νŠΈλ‘œ 톡신을 μˆ˜ν–‰ν•˜λŠ” 경우, μ €μž₯λΆ€(140)μ—λŠ” 톡신 λŒ€μƒ 기기인 μ™ΈλΆ€μž₯μΉ˜μ— λŒ€ν•œ 식별정보(예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, MAC address λ˜λŠ” IP address)κ°€ μ €μž₯될 수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the wireless interface unit 122 includes a wireless communication module that wirelessly supports one-to-one direct communication between the electronic device 1 and an external device without an access point. The wireless communication module may be implemented to support communication methods such as Wi-Fi Direct, Bluetooth, and Bluetooth low energy. When the electronic device 1 directly communicates with the external device, the storage unit 140 may store identification information (eg, MAC address or IP address) on the external device, which is a communication target device.

λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯치(1)μ—μ„œ, 무선 μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(122)λŠ” μ„±λŠ₯에 따라 λ¬΄μ„ λžœμœ λ‹›κ³Ό 무선톡신λͺ¨λ“ˆ 쀑 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ— μ˜ν•΄ μ™ΈλΆ€μž₯μΉ˜μ™€ 무선 톡신을 μˆ˜ν–‰ν•˜λ„λ‘ λ§ˆλ ¨λœλ‹€.In the electronic device 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention, the wireless interface unit 122 is provided to perform wireless communication with an external device by at least one of a wireless LAN unit and a wireless communication module according to performance.

λ‹€λ₯Έ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ 무선 μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(122)λŠ” LTE와 같은 이동톡신, 자기μž₯을 ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” EM 톡신, κ°€μ‹œκ΄‘ν†΅μ‹  λ“±μ˜ λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ 톡신방식에 μ˜ν•œ 톡신λͺ¨λ“ˆμ„ 더 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.In another embodiment, the air interface unit 122 may further include a communication module using various communication methods such as mobile communication such as LTE, EM communication including a magnetic field, and visible light communication.

무선 μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(122)λŠ” λ„€νŠΈμ›Œν¬ μƒμ˜ μ„œλ²„ λ“±μ˜ μ™ΈλΆ€μž₯μΉ˜μ™€ 무선 ν†΅μ‹ ν•¨μœΌλ‘œμ¨, μ™ΈλΆ€μž₯μΉ˜μ™€ 데이터 νŒ¨ν‚·μ„ μ†‘μˆ˜μ‹ ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.The wireless interface unit 122 may transmit and receive data packets to and from the external device by wirelessly communicating with an external device such as a server on a network.

무선 μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(122)λŠ” 적외선 ν†΅μ‹ κ·œκ²©μ— 따라 IR(Infrared) μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό 솑신 및/λ˜λŠ” μˆ˜μ‹ ν•  수 μžˆλŠ” IR솑신뢀 및/λ˜λŠ” IRμˆ˜μ‹ λΆ€λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. 무선 μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(122)λŠ” IR솑신뢀 및/λ˜λŠ” IRμˆ˜μ‹ λΆ€λ₯Ό 톡해 리λͺ¨μ»¨ λ˜λŠ” λ‹€λ₯Έ μ™ΈλΆ€μž₯μΉ˜λ‘œλΆ€ν„° 리λͺ¨μ»¨μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹  λ˜λŠ” μž…λ ₯ν•˜κ±°λ‚˜, λ‹€λ₯Έ μ™ΈλΆ€μž₯치둜 리λͺ¨μ»¨μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό 전솑 λ˜λŠ” 좜λ ₯ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. λ‹€λ₯Έ μ˜ˆλ‘œμ„œ, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” μ™€μ΄νŒŒμ΄(Wi-Fi), λΈ”λ£¨νˆ¬μŠ€(bluetooth) λ“± λ‹€λ₯Έ λ°©μ‹μ˜ 무선 μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(122)λ₯Ό 톡해 리λͺ¨μ»¨ λ˜λŠ” λ‹€λ₯Έ μ™ΈλΆ€μž₯μΉ˜μ™€ 리λͺ¨μ»¨μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μ†‘μˆ˜μ‹ ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.The wireless interface unit 122 may include an IR transmitter and/or an IR receiver capable of transmitting and/or receiving an IR (Infrared) signal according to an infrared communication standard. The wireless interface unit 122 may receive or input a remote control signal from a remote control or other external device through an IR transmitter and/or an IR receiver, or transmit or output a remote control signal to another external device. As another example, the electronic device 1 may transmit/receive a remote control signal to and from the remote control or other external device through the wireless interface unit 122 of another method such as Wi-Fi or Bluetooth.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ 무선 μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(122)λŠ” 마이크(microphone)와 같은 μŒμ„±μž…λ ₯λΆ€λ₯Ό 톡해 μˆ˜μ‹ λœ μ‚¬μš©μžμŒμ„±μ˜ μ •λ³΄λ‘œμ„œ μ†Œμ • 데이터λ₯Ό μ„œλ²„μ™€ 같은 μ™ΈλΆ€μž₯치둜 전솑할 수 μžˆλ‹€. μ—¬κΈ°μ„œ, μ „μ†‘λ˜λŠ” λ°μ΄ν„°μ˜ ν˜•νƒœ/μ’…λ₯˜λŠ” ν•œμ •λ˜μ§€ μ•ŠμœΌλ©°, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, μ‚¬μš©μžλ‘œλΆ€ν„° λ°œν™”λœ μŒμ„±μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” μ˜€λ””μ˜€μ‹ ν˜Έλ‚˜, μ˜€λ””μ˜€μ‹ ν˜Έλ‘œλΆ€ν„° μΆ”μΆœλœ μŒμ„±νŠΉμ§• 등을 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the wireless interface unit 122 may transmit predetermined data as information of a user's voice received through a voice input unit such as a microphone to an external device such as a server. Here, the form/type of the transmitted data is not limited, and for example, an audio signal corresponding to a voice uttered by a user or a voice characteristic extracted from the audio signal may be included.

λ˜ν•œ, 무선 μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(122)λŠ” μ„œλ²„μ™€ 같은 μ™ΈλΆ€μž₯μΉ˜λ‘œλΆ€ν„° ν•΄λ‹Ή μ‚¬μš©μžμŒμ„±μ˜ 처리 결과의 데이터λ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹ ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” μˆ˜μ‹ λœ 데이터에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬, μŒμ„± μ²˜λ¦¬κ²°κ³Όμ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” μ‚¬μš΄λ“œλ₯Ό λ‚΄λΆ€ λ˜λŠ” μ™ΈλΆ€μ˜ μŠ€ν”Όμ»€(loudspeaker)λ₯Ό 톡해 좜λ ₯ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.In addition, the wireless interface unit 122 may receive data of the processing result of the user's voice from an external device such as a server. The electronic device 1 may output a sound corresponding to the voice processing result through an internal or external loudspeaker based on the received data.

λ‹€λ§Œ, μƒκΈ°ν•œ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆλŠ” μ˜ˆμ‹œλ‘œμ„œ, μ‚¬μš©μžμŒμ„±μ„ μ„œλ²„λ‘œ μ „μ†‘ν•˜μ§€ μ•Šκ³ , μ „μžμž₯치(1) λ‚΄μ—μ„œ 자체적으둜 μ²˜λ¦¬ν•  μˆ˜λ„ μžˆλ‹€. 즉, λ‹€λ₯Έ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ μ „μžμž₯치(1)κ°€ STT(speech to text) μ„œλ²„μ˜ 역할을 μˆ˜ν–‰ν•˜λ„λ‘ κ΅¬ν˜„ κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜λ‹€.However, the above-described embodiment is an example, and the user's voice may be processed by itself in the electronic device 1 without transmitting the user's voice to the server. That is, in another embodiment, the electronic device 1 may be implemented to perform the role of a speech to text (STT) server.

μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” 무선 μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(122)λ₯Ό 톡해 리λͺ¨μ»¨κ³Ό 같은 μž…λ ₯μž₯μΉ˜μ™€ 톡신을 μˆ˜ν–‰ν•˜μ—¬, μž…λ ₯μž₯μΉ˜λ‘œλΆ€ν„° μ‚¬μš©μžμŒμ„±μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” μ†Œλ¦¬ μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹ ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.The electronic device 1 may communicate with an input device such as a remote control through the wireless interface unit 122 to receive a sound signal corresponding to a user voice from the input device.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ˜ μ „μžμž₯치(1)μ—μ„œ, μ™ΈλΆ€μ˜ μ„œλ²„ λ“±κ³Ό ν†΅μ‹ ν•˜λŠ” 톡신λͺ¨λ“ˆκ³Ό 리λͺ¨μ»¨κ³Ό ν†΅μ‹ ν•˜λŠ” 톡신λͺ¨λ“ˆμ€ μ„œλ‘œ λ‹€λ₯Ό 수 μžˆλ‹€. 예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ”, μ„œλ²„μ™€ 이더넷 λͺ¨λŽ€ λ˜λŠ” μ™€μ΄νŒŒμ΄ λͺ¨λ“ˆμ„ 톡해 톡신을 μˆ˜ν–‰ν•˜κ³ , 리λͺ¨μ»¨κ³Ό λΈ”λ£¨νˆ¬μŠ€ λͺ¨λ“ˆμ„ 톡해 톡신을 μˆ˜ν–‰ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.In the electronic device 1 according to an embodiment, a communication module that communicates with an external server and the like and a communication module that communicates with the remote control may be different from each other. For example, the electronic device 1 may communicate with the server through an Ethernet modem or Wi-Fi module, and may communicate with a remote controller and a Bluetooth module.

λ‹€λ₯Έ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ˜ μ „μžμž₯치(1)μ—μ„œ, μ™ΈλΆ€μ˜ μ„œλ²„ λ“±κ³Ό ν†΅μ‹ ν•˜λŠ” 톡신λͺ¨λ“ˆκ³Ό 리λͺ¨μ»¨κ³Ό ν†΅μ‹ ν•˜λŠ” 톡신λͺ¨λ“ˆμ€ 같을 수 μžˆλ‹€. 예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” λΈ”λ£¨νˆ¬μŠ€ λͺ¨λ“ˆμ„ 톡해 μ„œλ²„ 및 리λͺ¨μ»¨κ³Ό 톡신을 μˆ˜ν–‰ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.In the electronic device 1 according to another embodiment, a communication module for communicating with an external server and the like and a communication module for communicating with the remote control may be the same. For example, the electronic device 1 may communicate with a server and a remote controller through a Bluetooth module.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ 무선 μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(122)λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치(1)에 λ‚΄μž₯λ˜λ‚˜, 동글(dongle) λ˜λŠ” λͺ¨λ“ˆ(module) ν˜•νƒœλ‘œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ˜μ–΄ μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 컀λ„₯터에 μ°©νƒˆλ  μˆ˜λ„ μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the wireless interface unit 122 is embedded in the electronic device 1 , but may be implemented in the form of a dongle or a module to be detachably attached to the connector of the electronic device 1 .

μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯λΆ€(130)λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The electronic device 1 may include a user input unit 130 .

μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯λΆ€(130)λŠ” μ‚¬μš©μžμ˜ μž…λ ₯에 μ˜ν•΄, κΈ°μ„€μ •λœ λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ μ œμ–΄ μ»€λ§¨λ“œ λ˜λŠ” ν•œμ •λ˜μ§€ μ•Šμ€ 정보λ₯Ό ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)에 μ „λ‹¬ν•œλ‹€.The user input unit 130 transmits various preset control commands or non-limited information to the processor 170 according to a user's input.

μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯λΆ€(130)λŠ” μ‚¬μš©μž μž…λ ₯을 μˆ˜μ‹ ν•  수 μžˆλŠ” λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ μž…λ ₯μˆ˜λ‹¨μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•œλ‹€.The user input unit 130 includes various input means capable of receiving a user input.

도 5λŠ” λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜μ—μ„œ μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯이 μˆ˜μ‹ λ˜λŠ” μ˜ˆλ“€μ„ λ„μ‹œν•œλ‹€.5 illustrates examples of receiving a user input in an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯λΆ€(130)λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치(1)에 마련된 전원킀, μˆ«μžν‚€, 메뉴킀 λ“±μ˜ λ²„νŠΌμ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” ν‚€νŒ¨λ“œ(λ˜λŠ” μž…λ ₯νŒ¨λ„)λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the user input unit 130 may include a keypad (or input panel) including buttons such as a power key, a number key, and a menu key provided in the electronic device 1 .

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯λΆ€(130)λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치(1)λ₯Ό μ›κ²©μœΌλ‘œ μ œμ–΄ κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜κ²Œ κΈ°μ„€μ •λœ μ»€λ§¨λ“œ/데이터/정보/μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μƒμ„±ν•˜μ—¬ μ „μžμž₯치(1)둜 μ „μ†‘ν•˜λŠ” μž…λ ₯μž₯치λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the user input unit 130 may include an input device that generates a preset command/data/information/signal to remotely control the electronic device 1 and transmits the generated command/data/information/signal to the electronic device 1 .

μž…λ ₯μž₯μΉ˜λŠ”, 도 5에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, 리λͺ¨μ»¨(remote control)(201), κ²Œμž„μ½˜μ†”(game console)(202), ν‚€λ³΄λ“œ(keyboard), 마우슀(mouse) 등을 ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λ©°, μ „μžμž₯치(1)와 이격 λΆ„λ¦¬λ˜μ–΄, μ‚¬μš©μž μž…λ ₯을 μˆ˜μ‹ ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. As shown in FIG. 5, the input device includes a remote control 201, a game console 202, a keyboard, a mouse, and the like, and an electronic device 1 and is separated from each other, it is possible to receive a user input.

리λͺ¨μ»¨(201)μ—λŠ” μ‚¬μš©μž μž…λ ₯을 μˆ˜μ‹ ν•  수 μžˆλŠ” 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ λ²„νŠΌμ΄ 마련될 수 μžˆλ‹€. 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ 리λͺ¨μ»¨(201)μ—λŠ” μ‚¬μš©μžμ˜ ν„°μΉ˜μž…λ ₯을 μˆ˜μ‹ ν•˜λŠ” ν„°μΉ˜κ°μ§€λΆ€ 및/λ˜λŠ” μ‚¬μš©μžμ— μ˜ν•œ 리λͺ¨μ»¨(201) 자체의 μ›€μ§μž„μ„ κ°μ§€ν•˜λŠ” λͺ¨μ…˜κ°μ§€λΆ€κ°€ 마련될 수 μžˆλ‹€. 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ μž…λ ₯μž₯μΉ˜λŠ” 리λͺ¨μ»¨ μ–΄ν”Œλ¦¬μΌ€μ΄μ…˜μ΄ μ„€μΉ˜λœ 슀마트폰과 같은 단말μž₯치(203)λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λ©°, 이 경우 ν„°μΉ˜μŠ€ν¬λ¦°μ„ ν†΅ν•œ μ‚¬μš©μžμ˜ ν„°μΉ˜μž…λ ₯이 μˆ˜μ‹  κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜λ‹€.At least one button for receiving a user input may be provided in the remote control 201 . In an embodiment, the remote control 201 may be provided with a touch sensing unit that receives a user's touch input and/or a motion sensing unit that detects movement of the remote control 201 itself by the user. In an embodiment, the input device includes a terminal device 203 such as a smartphone on which a remote control application is installed, and in this case, a user's touch input through the touch screen can be received.

μž…λ ₯μž₯μΉ˜λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치(1) 본체와 무선톡신이 κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ μ™ΈλΆ€μž₯μΉ˜κ°€ 되며, 무선톡신은 λΈ”λ£¨νˆ¬μŠ€, 적외선 톡신, RF 톡신, λ¬΄μ„ λžœ, μ™€μ΄νŒŒμ΄ λ‹€μ΄λ ‰νŠΈ 등을 ν¬ν•¨ν•œλ‹€.The input device becomes an external device capable of wireless communication with the main body of the electronic device 1, and wireless communication includes Bluetooth, infrared communication, RF communication, wireless LAN, Wi-Fi Direct, and the like.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯λΆ€(130)λŠ” μ‚¬μš©μžλ‘œλΆ€ν„° λ°œν™”λœ μŒμ„±/μ‚¬μš΄λ“œλ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹ ν•˜λŠ” μŒμ„±μž…λ ₯λΆ€(205)λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. μŒμ„±μž…λ ₯λΆ€(250)λŠ” μ‚¬μš©μžμŒμ„±μ„ μˆ˜μ‹ ν•  수 μžˆλŠ” 마이크(microphone)λ‘œμ„œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ˜λ©°, λ§ˆμ΄ν¬λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치(1)에 λ§ˆλ ¨λ˜κ±°λ‚˜, μ „μžμž₯치(1)와 이격 λΆ„λ¦¬λ˜μ–΄ λ§ˆλ ¨λ˜κ±°λ‚˜, λ˜λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치(1)와 이격 λΆ„λ¦¬λœ λ‹€λ₯Έ μž₯치, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, 리λͺ¨μ»¨(201)에 마련될 수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the user input unit 130 may include a voice input unit 205 for receiving a voice/sound uttered by the user. The voice input unit 250 is implemented as a microphone capable of receiving a user's voice, and the microphone is provided in the electronic device 1 , or provided separately from the electronic device 1 , or the electronic device 1 . It may be provided in another device spaced apart from each other, for example, the remote control 201 .

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯λΆ€(130)λŠ” μ‚¬μš©μžμ˜ μ†μ˜ μ›€μ§μž„, λ‹€μ‹œ 말해, ν•Έλ“œ 제슀처(hand gesture)(μ΄ν•˜, 제슀처 라고도 ν•œλ‹€)λ₯Ό κ°μ§€ν•˜λŠ” λͺ¨μ…˜κ°μ§€λΆ€(204)λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” λͺ¨μ…˜κ°μ§€λΆ€(204)λŠ” μ†μ˜ 이동거리, 이동속도, μ΄λ™μ˜μ—­μ˜ 면적 등을 κ°μ§€ν•˜μ—¬ 데이터λ₯Ό 좜λ ₯ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. In an embodiment, the user input unit 130 may include a motion detection unit 204 that detects a motion of the user's hand, that is, a hand gesture (hereinafter, also referred to as a gesture). The electronic device 1 may output data by detecting a movement distance, a movement speed, an area of a movement region, and the like, of the motion detection unit 204 of the hand.

μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯λΆ€(130)λ‘œμ„œ λͺ¨μ…˜κ°μ§€λΆ€(204)λ₯Ό μ‚¬μš©ν•˜λ„λ‘ ν•˜λŠ” νŠΈλ¦¬κ±°κ°€ κ°μ§€λ˜λ©΄, 그에 λŒ€ν•œ 트리거 ν”Όλ“œλ°±μ„ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110) 등을 톡해 μ œκ³΅ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.When a trigger for using the motion detection unit 204 as the user input unit 130 is detected, the electronic device 1 may provide a trigger feedback therefor through the display 110 or the like.

μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” λͺ¨μ…˜κ°μ§€λΆ€(204)μ—μ„œ 좜λ ₯λ˜λŠ” 데이터λ₯Ό μ΄μš©ν•˜μ—¬ 제슀처의 λͺ¨μ…˜μ •보λ₯Ό νšλ“ν•˜κ³ , 그에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” λ™μž‘μ„ μˆ˜ν–‰ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” νšλ“λœ λͺ¨μ…˜μ •보λ₯Ό μ €μž₯λΆ€(140)에 μ €μž₯된 데이터와 λΉ„κ΅ν•˜μ—¬ 보정할 수 있으며, κ·Έ 결과에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” μ»€λ§¨λ“œμ˜ λ™μž‘μ„ μˆ˜ν–‰ν•¨μœΌλ‘œμ¨, μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 λ™μž‘μ„ μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.The electronic device 1 may obtain motion information of a gesture by using data output from the motion sensing unit 204 and perform an operation corresponding thereto. In an embodiment, the electronic device 1 may compare and correct the obtained motion information with data stored in the storage unit 140 , and perform an operation of a command corresponding to the result, thereby operating the electronic device 1 . can be controlled.

μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” μ €μž₯λΆ€(140)λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The electronic device 1 may include a storage unit 140 .

μ €μž₯λΆ€(140)λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ 데이터λ₯Ό μ €μž₯ν•˜λ„λ‘ κ΅¬μ„±λœλ‹€.The storage unit 140 is configured to store various data of the electronic device 1 .

μ €μž₯λΆ€(140)λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치(1)에 κ³΅κΈ‰λ˜λŠ” 전원이 μ°¨λ‹¨λ˜λ”λΌλ„ 데이터듀이 λ‚¨μ•„μžˆμ„ 수 있으며, 변동사항을 λ°˜μ˜ν•  수 μžˆλ„λ‘ μ“°κΈ° κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ λΉ„νœ˜λ°œμ„± λ©”λͺ¨λ¦¬(writable ROM)둜 ꡬ비될 수 μžˆλ‹€. 즉, μ €μž₯λΆ€(140)λŠ” ν”Œλž˜μ‰¬ λ©”λͺ¨λ¦¬(flash memory), EPROM λ˜λŠ” EEPROM 쀑 μ–΄λŠ ν•˜λ‚˜λ‘œ ꡬ비될 수 μžˆλ‹€. μ €μž₯λΆ€(140)λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 읽기 λ˜λŠ” μ“°κΈ° 속도가 λΉ„νœ˜λ°œμ„± λ©”λͺ¨λ¦¬μ— λΉ„ν•΄ λΉ λ₯Έ DRAM λ˜λŠ” SRAMκ³Ό 같은 νœ˜λ°œμ„± λ©”λͺ¨λ¦¬(volatile memory)λ₯Ό 더 ꡬ비할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The storage unit 140 may retain data even if the power supplied to the electronic device 1 is cut off, and may be provided as a writable non-volatile memory (writable ROM) to reflect changes. That is, the storage unit 140 may be provided with any one of a flash memory, an EPROM, or an EEPROM. The storage unit 140 may further include a volatile memory such as DRAM or SRAM, in which the read or write speed of the electronic device 1 is faster than that of the nonvolatile memory.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, μ €μž₯λΆ€(140)μ—λŠ” EDID(Extended Display Identification Data)κ°€ μ €μž₯되며, EDIDλŠ” μ˜μƒμ„ ν‘œμ‹œν•˜λŠ” λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 해상도 정보λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•œλ‹€. λ³Έ λͺ…μ„Έμ„œμ—μ„œ EDIDλŠ” E-EDID(Enhanced Extended Display Identification Data)λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” μš©μ–΄λ‘œμ„œ μ‚¬μš©λœλ‹€.In an embodiment, Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) is stored in the storage unit 140 , and the EDID includes resolution information of the display 110 displaying an image. EDID is used herein as a term including Enhanced Extended Display Identification Data (E-EDID).

μ €μž₯λΆ€(140)에 μ €μž₯λ˜λŠ” λ°μ΄ν„°λŠ”, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄ μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 ꡬ동을 μœ„ν•œ 운영체제λ₯Ό λΉ„λ‘―ν•˜μ—¬, 이 운영체제 μƒμ—μ„œ μ‹€ν–‰ κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨, μ–΄ν”Œλ¦¬μΌ€μ΄μ…˜, μ˜μƒλ°μ΄ν„°, 뢀가데이터 등을 ν¬ν•¨ν•œλ‹€.The data stored in the storage unit 140 includes, for example, an operating system for driving the electronic device 1 , and various programs, applications, image data, and additional data executable on the operating system.

ꡬ체적으둜, μ €μž₯λΆ€(140)λŠ” ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)의 μ œμ–΄μ— 따라 각 κ΅¬μ„±μš”μ†Œλ“€μ˜ λ™μž‘μ— λŒ€μ‘λ˜κ²Œ μž…/좜λ ₯λ˜λŠ” μ‹ ν˜Έ λ˜λŠ” 데이터λ₯Ό μ €μž₯ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. μ €μž₯λΆ€(140)λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 μ œμ–΄λ₯Ό μœ„ν•œ μ œμ–΄ ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨, μ œμ‘°μ‚¬μ—μ„œ μ œκ³΅λ˜κ±°λ‚˜ μ™ΈλΆ€λ‘œλΆ€ν„° λ‹€μš΄λ‘œλ“œ 받은 μ–΄ν”Œλ¦¬μΌ€μ΄μ…˜κ³Ό κ΄€λ ¨λœ UI, UIλ₯Ό μ œκ³΅ν•˜κΈ° μœ„ν•œ κ·Έλž˜ν”½ λ˜λŠ” 이미지, μ‚¬μš©μž 정보, λ¬Έμ„œ, λ°μ΄ν„°λ² μ΄μŠ€λ“€ λ˜λŠ” κ΄€λ ¨ 데이터듀을 μ €μž₯ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.Specifically, the storage unit 140 may store signals or data input/output corresponding to the operation of each component under the control of the processor 170 . The storage unit 140 includes a control program for controlling the electronic device 1, a UI related to an application provided by a manufacturer or downloaded from outside, a graphic or image for providing the UI, user information, documents, databases, or related data. can be saved

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ μ €μž₯λΆ€(140)μ—λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치(1)κ°€ ν…”λ ˆλΉ„μ „μœΌλ‘œ λ™μž‘ν•˜λ„λ‘ ν•˜λŠ” ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨μœΌλ‘œμ„œ TV μ–΄ν”Œλ¦¬μΌ€μ΄μ…˜ λ˜λŠ” TV ν΄λΌμ΄μ–ΈνŠΈμ™€, μ„œλ²„μ™€ 같은 μ†ŒμŠ€λ‘œλΆ€ν„° μˆ˜μ‹ λ˜λŠ” μ»¨ν…νŠΈκ°€ μž¬μƒλ˜λ„λ‘ ν•˜λŠ” ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨μœΌλ‘œμ„œ VOD μ–΄ν”Œλ¦¬μΌ€μ΄μ…˜ 등이 μ €μž₯될 수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the storage unit 140 stores a TV application or a TV client as a program for operating the electronic device 1 as a television, and a VOD application as a program for playing content received from a source such as a server. can

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, μ „μžμž₯치(1)μ—μ„œ ν‘œμ‹œλ˜λŠ” μ˜μƒμ€ ν”Œλž˜μ‹œλ©”λͺ¨λ¦¬, ν•˜λ“œλ””μŠ€ν¬ λ“±κ³Ό 같은 λΉ„νœ˜λ°œμ„±μ˜ μ €μž₯λΆ€(140)에 μ €μž₯된 λ°μ΄ν„°λ‘œλΆ€ν„° κΈ°μΈν•œ 것일 수 μžˆλ‹€. μ €μž₯λΆ€(140)λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 λ‚΄λΆ€ λ˜λŠ” 외뢀에 마련될 수 있으며, 외뢀에 λ§ˆλ ¨λ˜λŠ” 경우 μ €μž₯λΆ€(140)λŠ” μœ μ„  μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(121)λ₯Ό 톡해 μ „μžμž₯치(1)에 연결될 수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the image displayed in the electronic device 1 may be derived from data stored in the nonvolatile storage unit 140 such as a flash memory or a hard disk. The storage unit 140 may be provided inside or outside the electronic device 1 , and when provided outside, the storage unit 140 may be connected to the electronic device 1 through the wired interface unit 121 .

λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ˜ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ μ €μž₯λΆ€ λΌλŠ” μš©μ–΄λŠ” μ €μž₯λΆ€(140), ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170) λ‚΄ 둬(ROM)(λ„μ‹œλ˜μ§€ μ•„λ‹ˆν•¨), 램(RAM)(λ„μ‹œλ˜μ§€ μ•„λ‹ˆν•¨) λ˜λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치(1)에 μž₯μ°© κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ λ©”λͺ¨λ¦¬ μΉ΄λ“œ(λ„μ‹œλ˜μ§€ μ•„λ‹ˆν•¨)(예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, micro SD μΉ΄λ“œ, λ©”λͺ¨λ¦¬ μŠ€ν‹±)λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” κ²ƒμœΌλ‘œμ„œ μ •μ˜λœλ‹€.In an embodiment of the present invention, the term "storage unit" refers to a storage unit 140, a ROM (not shown) in the processor 170, a RAM (not shown), or mountable in the electronic device 1 . It is defined as including a memory card (not shown) (eg, micro SD card, memory stick).

μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” ꡬ동뢀(150)λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The electronic device 1 may include a driving unit 150 .

ꡬ동뢀(150)λŠ” λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λ₯Ό νšŒμ „μ‹œν‚€κΈ° μœ„ν•œ 동λ ₯을 μ œκ³΅ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.The driving unit 150 may provide power to rotate the display 110 .

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ ꡬ동뢀(150)λŠ”, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, μ •νšŒμ „ λ˜λŠ” μ—­νšŒμ „ κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ νšŒμ „μΆ•μ„ κ°€μ§„ λͺ¨ν„°λ‘œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the driving unit 150 may be implemented as a motor having a rotation shaft capable of forward rotation or reverse rotation, for example.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ ꡬ동뢀(150)λŠ” μŠ€νƒ λ“œ(100)에 λ§ˆλ ¨λ˜μ–΄, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 후방에 접속될 수 μžˆλ‹€. λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λŠ” ꡬ동뢀(150)의 νšŒμ „μΆ•μ— μž₯μ°©λ˜μ–΄, ꡬ동뢀(150)κ°€ ꡬ동됨에 따라 νšŒμ „μΆ•μ΄ νšŒμ „ν•˜κ²Œ 되면, 그에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ μ •λ°©ν–₯ λ˜λŠ” μ—­λ°©ν–₯으둜 νšŒμ „λ  수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the driving unit 150 may be provided on the stand 100 and connected to the rear of the display 110 . The display 110 is mounted on the rotating shaft of the driving unit 150 , and when the rotating shaft rotates as the driving unit 150 is driven, the display 110 may be rotated in a forward or reverse direction in response thereto.

ꡬ동뢀(150)에 μ „λ‹¬λ˜λŠ” μ œμ–΄μ‹ ν˜ΈλŠ”, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, μŠ€νƒ λ“œ(100)에 마련된 ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)에 μ˜ν•΄ 제곡될 수 μžˆλ‹€. 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, μ΄λŸ¬ν•œ μ œμ–΄μ‹ ν˜ΈλŠ”, 리λͺ¨μ»¨κ³Ό 같은 μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯λΆ€(130)λ₯Ό ν†΅ν•œ μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯에 따라 ꡬ동뢀(150)둜 좜λ ₯될 수 μžˆλ‹€.The control signal transmitted to the driving unit 150 may be provided by, for example, the processor 170 provided in the stand 100 . In an embodiment, such a control signal may be output to the driving unit 150 according to a user input through a user input unit 130 such as a remote control.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ”, ꡬ동뢀(150)의 νšŒμ „μ— κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)κ°€ κ°€λ‘œλͺ¨λ“œμ™€ μ„Έλ‘œλͺ¨λ“œ 간을 μ „ν™˜ν•˜λ„λ‘ ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the electronic device 1 may cause the display 110 to switch between a landscape mode and a portrait mode based on the rotation of the driving unit 150 .

μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” λ°©ν–₯감지뢀(160)λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The electronic device 1 may include a direction sensing unit 160 .

λ°©ν–₯감지뢀(160)λŠ” λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 ν˜„μž¬ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œ λ˜λŠ” ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œμ˜ μ „ν™˜μ„ 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The direction detecting unit 160 may identify the current screen mode or the change of the screen mode of the display 110 .

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ λ°©ν–₯감지뢀(160)λŠ” μŠ€νƒ λ“œ(100) 내뢀에 λ§ˆλ ¨λ˜μ–΄ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 νšŒμ „ 각도 λ˜λŠ” νšŒμ „ μƒνƒœλ₯Ό 감지할 수 μžˆλŠ” ν•˜λ‚˜ μ΄μƒμ˜ μ„Όμ„œλ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, λ°©ν–₯감지뢀(160)λŠ” 항상 μ²˜μŒμ— μ„€μ •ν•œ 일정 λ°©ν–₯을 μœ μ§€ν•˜λŠ” μ„±μ§ˆμ„ μ΄μš©ν•˜μ—¬ 물체의 λ°©μœ„ λ³€ν™”λ₯Ό μΈ‘μ •ν•˜λŠ” μžμ΄λ‘œμŠ€μ½”ν”„(gyroscope), λ˜λŠ” λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 μ›€μ§μž„ 즉, νšŒμ „μ„ 감지할 수 μžˆλŠ” κ°€μ†λ„μ„Όμ„œ λ“±μœΌλ‘œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the direction detecting unit 160 may include one or more sensors provided inside the stand 100 to detect a rotation angle or a rotation state of the display 110 . For example, the direction detecting unit 160 is a gyroscope for measuring a change in the orientation of an object by using the property of always maintaining the initially set constant direction, or to detect the movement, that is, rotation of the display 110 . It can be implemented as an accelerometer, etc.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯이, λ°©ν–₯감지뢀(160)에 μ˜ν•΄ μ‹λ³„λœ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œμ™€ λŒ€μ‘, 즉, λ§€μΉ˜λ˜λŠ” μ—¬λΆ€λ₯Ό 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€. μ—¬κΈ°μ„œ, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λŠ”, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œκ°€ λ˜λ„λ‘, ꡬ동뢀(150)에 μ˜ν•΄ νšŒμ „λ  수 μžˆλ‹€. μΌλ‘€λ‘œ, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯이 μ„Έλ‘œλ°©ν–₯인 경우, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λŠ” μ„Έλ‘œλͺ¨λ“œλ‘œ λ™μž‘ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the electronic device 1 identifies whether the arrangement direction of the UI including the plurality of menu items corresponds to the screen mode of the display 110 identified by the direction sensing unit 160 , that is, matches. can Here, the display 110 may be rotated by the driving unit 150 so as to be in a screen mode corresponding to the arrangement direction of the UI. For example, when the arrangement direction of the UI is the vertical direction, the display 110 may operate in the vertical mode.

μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The electronic device 1 may include a processor 170 .

ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 제반 ꡬ성듀이 λ™μž‘ν•˜κΈ° μœ„ν•œ μ œμ–΄λ₯Ό μˆ˜ν–‰ν•œλ‹€. ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” μ΄λŸ¬ν•œ μ œμ–΄ λ™μž‘μ„ μˆ˜ν–‰ν•  수 μžˆλ„λ‘ ν•˜λŠ” μ œμ–΄ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨(ν˜Ήμ€ μΈμŠ€νŠΈλŸ­μ…˜)κ³Ό, μ œμ–΄ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨μ΄ μ„€μΉ˜λ˜λŠ” λΉ„νœ˜λ°œμ„±μ˜ λ©”λͺ¨λ¦¬, μ„€μΉ˜λœ μ œμ–΄ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨μ˜ 적어도 일뢀가 λ‘œλ“œλ˜λŠ” νœ˜λ°œμ„±μ˜ λ©”λͺ¨λ¦¬ 및 λ‘œλ“œλœ μ œμ–΄ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨μ„ μ‹€ν–‰ν•˜λŠ” 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ λ²”μš© ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄ 마이크둜 ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(microprocessor), μ‘μš© ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(application processor) ν˜Ήμ€ CPU(central processing unit)λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. The processor 170 controls all components of the electronic device 1 to operate. The processor 170 includes a control program (or instructions) for performing such a control operation, a non-volatile memory in which the control program is installed, a volatile memory in which at least a part of the installed control program is loaded, and the loaded control program. It may include at least one general-purpose processor that executes, for example, a microprocessor, an application processor, or a central processing unit (CPU).

ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” μ‹±κΈ€ μ½”μ–΄, λ“€μ–Ό μ½”μ–΄, νŠΈλ¦¬ν”Œ μ½”μ–΄, μΏΌλ“œ μ½”μ–΄ 및 κ·Έ 배수의 μ½”μ–΄λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” 볡수의 ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ, 예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, 메인 ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(main processor) 및 슬립 λͺ¨λ“œ(sleep mode, 예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, λŒ€κΈ° μ „μ›λ§Œ κ³΅κΈ‰λ˜κ³  λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μž₯μΉ˜λ‘œμ„œ λ™μž‘ν•˜μ§€ μ•ŠλŠ”)μ—μ„œ λ™μž‘ν•˜λŠ” μ„œλΈŒ ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(sub processor)λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. λ˜ν•œ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ, 둬 및 λž¨μ€ λ‚΄λΆ€ λ²„μŠ€(bus)λ₯Ό 톡해 μƒν˜Έ 연결될 수 μžˆλ‹€.The processor 170 may include a single core, a dual core, a triple core, a quad core, and multiple cores thereof. The processor 170 includes a plurality of processors, for example, a main processor and a sub processor operating in a sleep mode (eg, only standby power is supplied and does not operate as a display device). ) may be included. In addition, the processor, ROM, and RAM may be interconnected through an internal bus.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” μ†ŒμŠ€λ‘œλΆ€ν„° μˆ˜μ‹ λœ μ»¨ν…νŠΈ μ‹ ν˜Έμ— λŒ€ν•΄ κΈ° μ„€μ •λœ λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ ν”„λ‘œμ„ΈμŠ€λ₯Ό μˆ˜ν–‰ν•˜λŠ” μ˜μƒμ²˜λ¦¬λΆ€λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” μ˜μƒμ²˜λ¦¬λ₯Ό μˆ˜ν–‰ν•˜μ—¬ 생성 λ˜λŠ” κ²°ν•©ν•œ 좜λ ₯ μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)에 좜λ ₯ν•¨μœΌλ‘œμ¨, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)에 μ˜μƒμ‹ ν˜Έμ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” μ˜μƒμ΄ ν‘œμ‹œλ˜κ²Œ ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the processor 170 may include an image processing unit that performs various preset processes on a content signal received from a source. The processor 170 may display an image corresponding to the image signal on the display 110 by outputting an output signal generated or combined by performing image processing to the display 110 .

μ˜μƒμ²˜λ¦¬λΆ€λŠ” μ˜μƒμ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 μ˜μƒ 포맷에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λ„λ‘ λ””μ½”λ“œν•˜λŠ” 디코더(decoder), μ˜μƒμ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 좜λ ₯κ·œκ²©μ— λ§žλ„λ‘ μ‘°μ ˆν•˜λŠ” μŠ€μΌ€μΌλŸ¬(scaler)λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The image processing unit may include a decoder that decodes the image signal to correspond to the image format of the electronic device 1 , and a scaler that adjusts the image signal to match the output standard of the display 110 .

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, λ””μ½”λ”λŠ”, 예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, H.264 디코더인 것을 μΌλ‘€λ‘œ ν•˜μ§€λ§Œ 이에 ν•œμ •λ˜λŠ” 것은 μ•„λ‹ˆλ‹€. 즉, λ³Έ 발λͺ… μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ λΉ„λ””μ˜€ λ””μ½”λ”λŠ” MPEG(Moving Picture Experts Group) 디코더 λ˜λŠ” HEVC(High Efficiency Video Codec) 디코더 λ“± λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ μ••μΆ• ν‘œμ€€μ— λ”°λ₯Έ λ””μ½”λ”λ‘œμ„œ κ΅¬ν˜„ κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜λ‹€.In one embodiment, the decoder is, for example, but not limited to, an H.264 decoder. That is, the video decoder according to the embodiment of the present invention can be implemented as a decoder according to various compression standards, such as a Moving Picture Experts Group (MPEG) decoder or a High Efficiency Video Codec (HEVC) decoder.

λ˜ν•œ, λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ—μ„œ μ˜μƒμ²˜λ¦¬λΆ€κ°€ μ²˜λ¦¬ν•˜λŠ” μ»¨ν…νŠΈμ˜ μ’…λ₯˜λŠ” ν•œμ •λ˜μ§€ μ•ŠλŠ”λ‹€. 예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, μ˜μƒμ²˜λ¦¬λΆ€μ—μ„œ 처리 κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ μ»¨ν…νŠΈλŠ” λΉ„λ””μ˜€μ™€ 같은 λ™μ˜μƒλΏ μ•„λ‹ˆλΌ, JPEG 파일과 같은 사진, λ°°κ²½ν™”λ©΄ λ“±μ˜ 정지화상, UI의 메뉴항λͺ© 등을 더 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.Also, in the present invention, the type of content processed by the image processing unit is not limited. For example, the content that can be processed by the image processing unit may further include a picture such as a JPEG file, a still image such as a background screen, and a menu item of a UI, as well as a moving picture such as a video.

λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ˜ μ˜μƒμ²˜λ¦¬λΆ€κ°€ μˆ˜ν–‰ν•˜λŠ” μ˜μƒμ²˜λ¦¬ ν”„λ‘œμ„ΈμŠ€μ˜ μ’…λ₯˜λŠ” ν•œμ •λ˜μ§€ μ•ŠλŠ”λ°”, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄ μΈν„°λ ˆμ΄μŠ€(interlace) λ°©μ‹μ˜ λ°©μ†‘μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλ ˆμ‹œλΈŒ(progressive) λ°©μ‹μœΌλ‘œ λ³€ν™˜ν•˜λŠ” λ””μΈν„°λ ˆμ΄μ‹±(de-interlacing), μ˜μƒ ν™”μ§ˆ κ°œμ„ μ„ μœ„ν•œ λ…Έμ΄μ¦ˆ κ°μ†Œ(noise reduction), λ””ν…ŒμΌ κ°•ν™”(detail enhancement), ν”„λ ˆμž„ λ¦¬ν”„λ ˆμ‹œ 레이트(frame refresh rate) λ³€ν™˜, 라인 μŠ€μΊλ‹(line scanning) λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ ν”„λ‘œμ„ΈμŠ€ 쀑 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜λ₯Ό μˆ˜ν–‰ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.The type of the image processing process performed by the image processing unit of the present invention is not limited, for example, de-interlacing for converting an interlace broadcasting signal into a progressive method, and image quality improvement. At least one of various processes such as noise reduction, detail enhancement, frame refresh rate conversion, and line scanning may be performed.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ μ˜μƒμ²˜λ¦¬λΆ€λŠ” μ΄λŸ¬ν•œ 각 ν”„λ‘œμ„ΈμŠ€λ₯Ό μˆ˜ν–‰ν•˜κΈ° μœ„ν•œ λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ μΉ©μ…‹, λ©”λͺ¨λ¦¬, μ „μžλΆ€ν’ˆ, λ°°μ„  λ“±μ˜ 회둜 ꡬ성이 μΈμ‡„νšŒλ‘œκΈ°νŒ(PCB) 상에 μ‹€μž₯된 μ˜μƒλ³΄λ“œλ‘œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  수 μžˆλ‹€. 이 경우, μ „μžμž₯치(1)μ—λŠ” νŠœλ„ˆ, μ˜μƒμ²˜λ¦¬λΆ€λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)κ°€ λ‹¨μΌμ˜ μ˜μƒλ³΄λ“œμ— 마련될 수 μžˆλ‹€. λ¬Όλ‘ , μ΄λŠ” 일둀에 λΆˆκ³Όν•˜κ³  μ„œλ‘œ 톡신 κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜κ²Œ μ—°κ²°λœ 볡수의 μΈμ‡„νšŒλ‘œκΈ°νŒμ— 배치될 μˆ˜λ„ μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the image processing unit may be implemented as an image board in which circuit configurations such as various chipsets, memories, electronic components, and wiring for performing each of these processes are mounted on a printed circuit board (PCB). In this case, the electronic device 1 may include a processor 170 including a tuner and an image processing unit on a single image board. Of course, this is only an example and may be disposed on a plurality of printed circuit boards communicatively connected to each other.

λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯치(1)μ—μ„œ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” λ°©μ†‘μ‹ ν˜Έμ— κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ μ†Œμ • μ±„λ„μ˜ μ˜μƒμ΄ ν‘œμ‹œλ˜λ„λ‘ ν•΄λ‹Ή μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μ²˜λ¦¬ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. λ˜ν•œ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(120)λ₯Ό 톡해 μ„œλ²„λ‘œλΆ€ν„° μˆ˜μ‹ ν•œ μ‹ ν˜Έμ— κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ μ†Œμ • μ»¨ν…νŠΈμ˜ μ˜μƒμ΄ ν‘œμ‹œλ˜λ„λ‘ ν•΄λ‹Ή μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μ²˜λ¦¬ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.In the electronic device 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention, the processor 170 may process the corresponding signal so that an image of a predetermined channel is displayed based on the broadcast signal. In addition, the processor 170 may process the signal so that an image of a predetermined content is displayed based on a signal received from the server through the interface unit 120 .

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치(1)에 λ‚΄μž₯λ˜λŠ” PCB 상에 μ‹€μž₯λ˜λŠ” 메인 SoC(Main SoC)에 ν¬ν•¨λ˜λŠ” ν˜•νƒœλ‘œμ„œ κ΅¬ν˜„ κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜λ‹€. In an embodiment, the processor 170 may be implemented in a form included in a main SoC mounted on a PCB embedded in the electronic device 1 .

μ œμ–΄ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨μ€, BIOS, λ””λ°”μ΄μŠ€λ“œλΌμ΄λ²„, μš΄μ˜μ²΄κ³„, νŽŒμ›¨μ–΄, ν”Œλž«νΌ 및 μ–΄ν”Œλ¦¬μΌ€μ΄μ…˜ 쀑 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ ν˜•νƒœλ‘œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ˜λŠ” ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨(λ“€)을 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆλ‘œμ„œ, μ–΄ν”Œλ¦¬μΌ€μ΄μ…˜μ€, μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 제쑰 μ‹œμ— μ „μžμž₯치(1)에 미리 μ„€μΉ˜ λ˜λŠ” μ €μž₯λ˜κ±°λ‚˜, ν˜Ήμ€ μΆ”ν›„ μ‚¬μš© μ‹œμ— μ™ΈλΆ€λ‘œλΆ€ν„° μ–΄ν”Œλ¦¬μΌ€μ΄μ…˜μ˜ 데이터λ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹ ν•˜μ—¬ μˆ˜μ‹ λœ 데이터에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ μ „μžμž₯치(1)에 μ„€μΉ˜λ  수 μžˆλ‹€. μ–΄ν”Œλ¦¬μΌ€μ΄μ…˜μ˜ λ°μ΄ν„°λŠ”, μ˜ˆμ»¨λŒ€, μ–΄ν”Œλ¦¬μΌ€μ΄μ…˜ λ§ˆμΌ“κ³Ό 같은 μ™ΈλΆ€ μ„œλ²„λ‘œλΆ€ν„° μ „μžμž₯치(1)둜 λ‹€μš΄λ‘œλ“œλ  μˆ˜λ„ μžˆλ‹€. 이와 같은 μ™ΈλΆ€ μ„œλ²„λŠ”, λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ˜ μ»΄ν“¨ν„°ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨μ œν’ˆμ˜ μΌλ‘€μ΄λ‚˜, 이에 ν•œμ •λ˜λŠ” 것은 μ•„λ‹ˆλ‹€.The control program may include program(s) implemented in the form of at least one of a BIOS, a device driver, an operating system, firmware, a platform, and an application. As an embodiment, the application is pre-installed or stored in the electronic device 1 when the electronic device 1 is manufactured, or receives data of the application from the outside when used later, and based on the received data, the electronic device (1) can be installed. Data of the application may be downloaded to the electronic device 1 from, for example, an external server such as an application market. Such an external server is an example of the computer program product of the present invention, but is not limited thereto.

μ œμ–΄ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨μ€ 컴퓨터와 같은 기기둜 읽을 수 μžˆλŠ” μ €μž₯맀체에 기둝될 수 μžˆλ‹€. 기기둜 읽을 수 μžˆλŠ” μ €μž₯λ§€μ²΄λŠ”, λΉ„μΌμ‹œμ (non-transitory) μ €μž₯맀체 λ˜λŠ” λΉ„νœ˜λ°œμ„±(non-volatile) μ €μž₯맀체의 ν˜•νƒœλ‘œ 제곡될 수 μžˆλ‹€. μ—¬κΈ°μ„œ, β€˜λΉ„μΌμ‹œμ  μ €μž₯맀체'λŠ” μ‹€μž¬(tangible)ν•˜λŠ” μž₯치이고, μ‹ ν˜Έ(signal)(예: μ „μžκΈ°νŒŒ)λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜μ§€ μ•ŠλŠ”λ‹€λŠ” 것을 μ˜λ―Έν•  뿐이며, 이 μš©μ–΄λŠ” 데이터가 μ €μž₯맀체에 반영ꡬ적으둜 μ €μž₯λ˜λŠ” κ²½μš°μ™€ μž„μ‹œμ μœΌλ‘œ μ €μž₯λ˜λŠ” 경우λ₯Ό κ΅¬λΆ„ν•˜μ§€ μ•ŠλŠ”λ‹€. μΌλ‘€λ‘œ, 'λΉ„μΌμ‹œμ  μ €μž₯맀체'λŠ” 데이터가 μž„μ‹œμ μœΌλ‘œ μ €μž₯λ˜λŠ” 버퍼λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The control program may be recorded in a storage medium readable by a device such as a computer. The device-readable storage medium may be provided in the form of a non-transitory storage medium or a non-volatile storage medium. Here, 'non-transitory storage medium' is a tangible device and only means that it does not contain a signal (eg, electromagnetic wave). It does not distinguish the case where it is stored as For example, the 'non-transitory storage medium' may include a buffer in which data is temporarily stored.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” 미리 μ„€μ •λœ 쑰건에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 μ‹λ³„ν•˜κ³ , κ·Έ μ‹λ³„λœ λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 UI의 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ λ°°μ—΄λ˜μ–΄ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)에 ν‘œμ‹œλ˜λ„λ‘ μ œμ–΄λ™μž‘μ„ μˆ˜ν–‰ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the processor 170 identifies an arrangement direction of the UI including a plurality of menu items based on a preset condition, and the plurality of menu items of the UI are arranged in the identified arrangement direction to be displayed on the display 110 . A control operation can be performed to be displayed.

μ—¬κΈ°μ„œ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보λ₯Ό νšλ“ν•˜κ³ , νšλ“λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€.Here, the processor 170 may obtain direction identification condition information, and identify the arrangement direction of the UI based on the obtained condition information.

λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λŠ”, 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄νŠΉμ„±κ³Ό 같이, 미리 μ„€μ •λœ 쑰건을 λ‚˜νƒ€λ‚΄λŠ” 정보λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The direction identification condition information may include information indicating a preset condition, such as arrangement characteristics of a plurality of menu items.

ꡬ체적으둜, 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ€ 제1메뉴항λͺ©, λ‹€μ‹œ 말해, 메인메뉴 ν•­λͺ©κ³Ό 제1메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ ν•˜μœ„ 계측인 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ 제2메뉴항λͺ©, λ‹€μ‹œ 말해, μ„œλΈŒλ©”λ‰΄ ν•­λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” 계측 ꡬ쑰λ₯Ό κ°€μ§ˆ 수 있으며, 이 경우 λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λŠ” 제1메뉴항λͺ©κ³Ό 제2메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄νŠΉμ„±μ— κ΄€ν•œ 정보λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.Specifically, the plurality of menu items may have a hierarchical structure including a first menu item, that is, a main menu item, and at least one second menu item, that is, a sub-menu item, which is a lower hierarchy of the first menu item. In this case, the direction identification condition information may include information about the arrangement characteristics of the first menu item and the second menu item.

볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ€ 계측과 κ°œλ³„ν•­λͺ©μ˜ 2개의 차원(λ°©ν–₯)으둜 배열될 수 μžˆλ‹€. λ‹€μ‹œ 말해, 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ€ 계측에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” λ°©ν–₯(μ΄ν•˜, 계측방ν–₯ 이라고도 ν•œλ‹€)κ³Ό 단일 계측 λ‚΄ ν•­λͺ©(λ“€)에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” λ°©ν–₯(μ΄ν•˜, ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯ 이라고도 ν•œλ‹€)으둜 배열될 수 있으며, μΌλ‘€λ‘œ, 계측방ν–₯은 κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯에, ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯은 μ„Έλ‘œλ°©ν–₯에 각각 λŒ€μ‘ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.A plurality of menu items may be arranged in two dimensions (directions): hierarchies and individual items. In other words, a plurality of menu items may be arranged in a direction corresponding to a hierarchy (hereinafter, also referred to as a hierarchical direction) and a direction corresponding to the item(s) in a single hierarchy (hereinafter also referred to as an item direction), for example, A hierarchical direction may correspond to a horizontal direction, and an item direction may correspond to a vertical direction, respectively.

ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UI에 κ΄€ν•΄, 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄νŠΉμ„±μœΌλ‘œμ„œ 계측방ν–₯의 νŠΉμ„± λ˜λŠ” ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯의 νŠΉμ„± 쀑 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ— κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€. μ—¬κΈ°μ„œ, 계측방ν–₯의 νŠΉμ„±κ³Ό ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯ νŠΉμ„±μ€ 제1메뉴항λͺ©μ™€ 제2메뉴항λͺ©μ„ κ΅¬μ„±ν•˜λŠ” 각 λ‹¨μœ„ ν•­λͺ©μ˜ 크기(폭 λ˜λŠ” 높이), λ°°μ—΄ 간격, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 크기 등을 κ³ λ €ν•˜μ—¬ 결정될 수 μžˆλ‹€.With respect to the UI including a plurality of menu items, the processor 170 may identify the arrangement direction of the UI based on at least one of a characteristic of a hierarchical direction or a characteristic of an item direction as an arrangement characteristic of the menu items. Here, the characteristics of the hierarchical direction and the characteristics of the item direction may be determined in consideration of the size (width or height) of each unit item constituting the first menu item and the second menu item, the arrangement interval, the size of the display 110 , and the like.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” 계측방ν–₯의 길이와 ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯의 길이λ₯Ό λΉ„κ΅ν•˜κ³ , 더 큰 값을 κ°€μ§€λŠ” μ–΄λŠ ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λ„λ‘ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€. 예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, 계측방ν–₯의 길이가 ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯의 길이보닀 큰 경우, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯은 계측방ν–₯, λ‹€μ‹œ 말해, κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 식별될 수 μžˆλ‹€. λ‹€λ₯Έ μ˜ˆλ‘œμ„œ, ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯의 길이가 계측방ν–₯의 길이보닀 큰 경우, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯은 ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯, λ‹€μ‹œ 말해, μ„Έλ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 식별될 수 μžˆλ‹€. μ—¬κΈ°μ„œ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” 계측방ν–₯의 길이와 ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯의 길이의 차이가 미리 μ •ν•΄μ§„ λ²”μœ„ 이상인 경우, μ–‘ λ°©ν–₯의 길이가 μƒμ΄ν•œ κ²ƒμœΌλ‘œ 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the processor 170 may compare the length of the hierarchical direction with the length of the item direction, and identify the arrangement direction of the UI to correspond to any one direction having a larger value. For example, when the length of the hierarchical direction is greater than the length of the item direction, the arrangement direction of the UI may be identified as the hierarchical direction, that is, the horizontal direction. As another example, when the length of the item direction is greater than the length of the hierarchical direction, the arrangement direction of the UI may be identified as the item direction, that is, the vertical direction. Here, when the difference between the length in the hierarchical direction and the length in the item direction is equal to or greater than a predetermined range, the processor 170 may identify that the lengths in both directions are different.

λ‹€λ₯Έ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” 계측방ν–₯의 λ©”λ‰΄μ˜ 단계 수, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, 제1메뉴항λͺ©κ³Ό 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ 제2메뉴항λͺ©μœΌλ‘œ 이루어진 계측 κ΅¬μ‘°μ—μ„œ 각 계측에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” 단계 수λ₯Ό 미리 μ„€μ •λœ 제1κΈ°μ€€κ°’κ³Ό λΉ„κ΅ν•˜κ³ , λ©”λ‰΄μ˜ 단계 μˆ˜κ°€ 제1κΈ°μ€€κ°’ 이상인 경우, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯이 계측방ν–₯, λ‹€μ‹œ 말해, κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” κ²ƒμœΌλ‘œ 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€. 제1기쀀값은, 제1메뉴항λͺ©μ™€ 제2메뉴항λͺ©μ„ κ΅¬μ„±ν•˜λŠ” 각 λ‹¨μœ„ ν•­λͺ©μ˜ 크기(폭 λ˜λŠ” 높이), λ°°μ—΄ 간격, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 크기 등을 κ³ λ €ν•˜μ—¬ 결정될 수 있으며, κ·Έ 값은 ν•œμ •λ˜μ§€ μ•ŠλŠ”λ‹€.In another embodiment, the processor 170 sets the number of steps in the menu in the hierarchical direction, for example, the number of steps corresponding to each layer in a hierarchical structure consisting of a first menu item and at least one second menu item. Compared with one reference value, when the number of menu steps is equal to or greater than the first reference value, it may be identified that the arrangement direction of the UI corresponds to the hierarchical direction, that is, the horizontal direction. The first reference value may be determined in consideration of the size (width or height) of each unit item constituting the first menu item and the second menu item, an arrangement interval, the size of the display 110, and the like, and the value is not limited. .

또 λ‹€λ₯Έ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯의 λ©”λ‰΄μ˜ 개수, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, 단일 λ‹¨κ³„μ—μ„œμ˜ 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ 개수λ₯Ό 미리 μ„€μ •λœ 제2κΈ°μ€€κ°’κ³Ό λΉ„κ΅ν•˜κ³ , 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ κ°œμˆ˜κ°€ 제2κΈ°μ€€κ°’ 이상인 경우, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯이 ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯, λ‹€μ‹œ 말해, μ„Έλ‘œλ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” κ²ƒμœΌλ‘œ 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€. 제2기쀀값은. 제1메뉴항λͺ©μ™€ 제2메뉴항λͺ©μ„ κ΅¬μ„±ν•˜λŠ” 각 λ‹¨μœ„ ν•­λͺ©μ˜ 크기(폭 λ˜λŠ” 높이), λ°°μ—΄ 간격, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 크기 등을 κ³ λ €ν•˜μ—¬ 결정될 수 있으며, κ·Έ 값은 ν•œμ •λ˜μ§€ μ•ŠλŠ”λ‹€.In another embodiment, the processor 170 compares the number of menu items in the item direction, for example, the number of menu items in a single step, with a preset second reference value, and when the number of menu items is equal to or greater than the second reference value, , it can be identified that the arrangement direction of the UI corresponds to the item direction, that is, the vertical direction. The second reference value is . The size (width or height) of each unit item constituting the first menu item and the second menu item, an arrangement interval, the size of the display 110, etc. may be taken into consideration, and the value is not limited.

μƒκΈ°ν•œ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆλ“€μ—μ„œλŠ”, λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보가 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄νŠΉμ„±μΈ 경우λ₯Ό 예둜 λ“€μ–΄ μ„€λͺ…ν•˜μ˜€μœΌλ‚˜, λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ—μ„œ, λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λŠ” 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄νŠΉμ„±μ— ν•œμ •λ˜μ§€ μ•ŠλŠ”λ‹€. In the above embodiments, the case where the direction identification condition information is an arrangement characteristic of a menu item has been described as an example, but in the present invention, the direction identification condition information is not limited to an arrangement characteristic of a menu item.

ꡬ체적으둜, λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λŠ”, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯이 μˆ˜μ‹  κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ μž…λ ₯μˆ˜λ‹¨μ˜ μ’…λ₯˜, μ‚¬μš©μžμ˜ μ„ ν˜Έλ„, νžˆμŠ€ν† λ¦¬ 정보, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 ν˜„μž¬ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œ λ“± μ „μžμž₯치(1)μ—μ„œ νšλ“ λ˜λŠ” λ„μΆœ κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ 정보λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.Specifically, the direction identification condition information may include, for example, the type of input means capable of receiving user input, user preference, history information, and various types of information obtainable or derived from the electronic device 1 such as the current screen mode of the display 110 . may contain information.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λ‘œμ„œ, μ‚¬μš©μžμ˜ μ„ ν˜Έλ„μ™€ νžˆμŠ€ν† λ¦¬ μ •λ³΄λŠ” μ €μž₯λΆ€(140) λ˜λŠ” μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(110)λ₯Ό 톡해 μ—°κ²° κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ μ„œλ²„ 등에 미리 μ €μž₯될 수 μžˆλ‹€. μΌλ‘€λ‘œ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” νžˆμŠ€ν† λ¦¬ 정보λ₯Ό μ΄μš©ν•œ ν•™μŠ΅μ— κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ μ‚¬μš©μžκ°€ μ„ ν˜Έν•˜λŠ” UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 λ„μΆœν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.As the direction identification condition information according to an embodiment, the user's preference and history information may be stored in advance in the storage unit 140 or a server connectable through the interface unit 110 . As an example, the processor 170 may derive a UI arrangement direction preferred by the user based on learning using the history information.

λ‹€λ₯Έ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λ‘œμ„œ, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 ν˜„μž¬ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλŠ” λ°©ν–₯감지뢀(160)의 좜λ ₯을 μ΄μš©ν•˜μ—¬ νšλ“λ  수 μžˆλ‹€. λ‹€λ₯Έ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 ν˜„μž¬ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œκ°€ κ°€λ‘œλͺ¨λ“œμ΄λ©΄ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€.As direction identification condition information according to another embodiment, the current screen mode of the display 110 may be obtained using the output of the direction detecting unit 160 . In another embodiment, for example, if the current screen mode of the display 110 is a landscape mode, the processor 170 may identify the arrangement direction of the UI as a horizontal direction.

λ³Έ 발λͺ…μ—μ„œ, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 μ‹λ³„ν•˜κΈ° μœ„ν•œ μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄μ˜ νšλ“ 방식은 ν•œμ •λ˜μ§€ μ•ŠμœΌλ©°, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, μ €μž₯λΆ€(140)에 μ €μž₯된 데이터, μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯λΆ€(130)λ₯Ό 톡해 μˆ˜μ‹ λ˜λŠ” μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯, μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(120)λ₯Ό 톡해 μ—°κ²° κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ μ™ΈλΆ€μž₯μΉ˜λ‘œλΆ€ν„° μˆ˜μ‹ λœ 데이터, λ°©ν–₯감지뢀(160)λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜μ—¬ μ „μžμž₯치(1)에 마련된 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ μ„Όμ„œμ˜ 좜λ ₯ 데이터 λ“±μœΌλ‘œλΆ€ν„° λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보λ₯Ό νšλ“ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.In the present invention, the method of obtaining condition information for identifying the arrangement direction of the UI is not limited, and the processor 170, for example, data stored in the storage unit 140, received through the user input unit 130 To obtain direction identification condition information from a user input, data received from an external device connectable through the interface unit 120 , and output data of at least one sensor provided in the electronic device 1 including the direction sensing unit 160 . can

도 6은 λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯치의 μ œμ–΄ λ™μž‘μ„ λ„μ‹œν•œ 도면이닀.6 is a diagram illustrating a control operation of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 도 5에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯에 따라 선택 κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UI에 κ΄€ν•œ λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보λ₯Ό νšλ“ν•˜κ³ (301), νšλ“λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 μ‹λ³„ν•˜κ³ (302), μ‹λ³„λœ λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 UI의 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ— λ°°μ—΄λ˜λ„λ‘ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€(303).In an embodiment of the present invention, as shown in FIG. 5 , the processor 170 of the electronic device 1 obtains direction identification condition information regarding a UI including a plurality of menu items selectable according to a user input, and ( 301 ), an arrangement direction of the UI is identified based on the obtained condition information ( 302 ), and the display 110 can be controlled to be arranged in a plurality of menu items of the UI in the identified arrangement direction ( 303 ).

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆλ‘œμ„œ, 상기와 같은 ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)의 λ™μž‘μ€ μ „μžμž₯치(1)와 λ³„λ„λ‘œ λ§ˆλ ¨λ˜λŠ” μ»΄ν“¨ν„°ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨μ œν’ˆ(λ―Έλ„μ‹œ)에 μ €μž₯된 μ»΄ν“¨ν„°ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨μœΌλ‘œ κ΅¬ν˜„λ  μˆ˜λ„ μžˆλ‹€.As an embodiment, the operation of the processor 170 as described above may be implemented as a computer program stored in a computer program product (not shown) provided separately from the electronic device 1 .

이 경우, μ»΄ν“¨ν„°ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨μ œν’ˆμ€ μ»΄ν“¨ν„°ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨μ— ν•΄λ‹Ήν•˜λŠ” μΈμŠ€νŠΈλŸ­μ…˜μ΄ μ €μž₯된 λΉ„μΌμ‹œμ  λ˜λŠ” λΉ„νœ˜λ°œμ„±μ˜ λ©”λͺ¨λ¦¬μ™€, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œλ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•œλ‹€. μΈμŠ€νŠΈλŸ­μ…˜μ€, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œμ— μ˜ν•΄ μ‹€ν–‰λ˜λ©΄, 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UI에 λŒ€κ΄€ λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보λ₯Ό νšλ“ν•˜κ³ , νšλ“λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 μ‹λ³„ν•˜κ³ , μ‹λ³„λœ λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 UI의 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ— λ°°μ—΄λ˜λ„λ‘ ν•˜λŠ” 것을 ν¬ν•¨ν•œλ‹€. In this case, the computer program product includes a non-transitory or non-volatile memory in which instructions corresponding to the computer program are stored, and a processor. The instruction, when executed by the processor, obtains rental direction identification condition information for a UI including a plurality of menu items, identifies an arrangement direction of the UI based on the obtained condition information, and identifies a plurality of UIs in the identified arrangement direction. This includes having them arranged in a menu item of .

이에 따라, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” λ³„λ„μ˜ μ»΄ν“¨ν„°ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨μ œν’ˆμ— μ €μž₯된 μ»΄ν“¨ν„°ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨μ„ λ‹€μš΄λ‘œλ“œ 및 μ‹€ν–‰ν•˜μ—¬, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)의 λ™μž‘μ„ μˆ˜ν–‰ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.Accordingly, the electronic device 1 may download and execute a computer program stored in a separate computer program product to perform the operation of the processor 170 .

μ΄ν•˜, 도면듀을 μ°Έμ‘°ν•˜μ—¬, λ³Έ 발λͺ… μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜μ—μ„œ UIλ₯Ό λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄ν•˜λŠ” μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆλ“€μ„ μ„€λͺ…ν•œλ‹€.Hereinafter, embodiments of displaying a UI in an electronic device of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

도 7은 λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜μ—μ„œ 볡수의 ν•­λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UIκ°€ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ˜λŠ” 일둀λ₯Ό λ„μ‹œν•˜λ©°, 도 8은 도 7μ—μ„œ 볡수의 ν•­λͺ© 쀑 μ–΄λŠ ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ 선택함에 따라 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ˜λŠ” UIλ₯Ό λ„μ‹œν•œ 도면이닀.7 illustrates an example in which a UI including a plurality of items is displayed in the electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 8 illustrates a UI displayed when any one of the plurality of items is selected in FIG. 7 . It is a drawing.

μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, μ‚¬μš©μžμ— μ˜ν•΄ 선택 κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©(401, 402, 403, 404, 405)λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UIκ°€ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)에 ν‘œμ‹œλ˜λ„λ‘ μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.The processor 170 of the electronic device 1 may control a UI including a plurality of menu items 401 , 402 , 403 , 404 , and 405 selectable by a user to be displayed on the display 110 .

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, UI의 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ€ 각각이 μ „μžμž₯치(1)와 μ—°κ²° κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜λ©° μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό μ œκ³΅ν•  수 μžˆλŠ” μ†ŒμŠ€(source)에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λ©°, 도 7은 μ†ŒμŠ€ 선택을 μœ„ν•΄ ν‘œμ‹œλ˜λŠ” UI 화면을 예둜 λ“€μ–΄ λ„μ‹œν•œ 것이닀. In an embodiment, each of the plurality of menu items of the UI corresponds to a source that can be connected to the electronic device 1 and can provide content, and FIG. 7 illustrates a UI screen displayed for selecting a source as an example. it is shown for

ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 도 7에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, ν™”λ©΄μ—μ„œ λΆ€μœ ν•˜λŠ” μž…μž, 즉, νŒŒν‹°ν΄(particle) ν˜•νƒœμ˜ 메뉴항λͺ©λ“€(401, 402, 403, 404, 405)을 ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UIλ₯Ό λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)에 ν‘œμ‹œν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.As shown in FIG. 7 , the processor 170 displays a UI including menu items 401, 402, 403, 404, 405 in the form of particles floating on the screen, ie, particles on the display 110 ) can be displayed.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ˜ μ „μžμž₯치(1)μ—μ„œ, 도 7의 UI 화면은 μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 λ…Έ μ‹œκ·Έλ„(no signal) 상황과 μ†ŒμŠ€ 선택 μƒν™©μ˜ 뢄리/ꡬ뢄 없이, μ—°μ†μ μœΌλ‘œ ν‘œμ‹œλ  수 μžˆλ‹€. λ‹€μ‹œ 말해, λ…Έ μ‹œκ·Έλ„ ν™”λ©΄μ—μ„œ μ†ŒμŠ€λ©”λ‰΄κ°€ μ„ νƒλ˜κ±°λ‚˜, μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€(110)에 νŠΉμ • μ†ŒμŠ€κ°€ μ—°κ²°λ˜λ©΄, 화면이 μ „ν™˜λ˜λŠ” κ΄€λ ¨κΈ°μˆ κ³Ό λŒ€λΉ„ν•˜μ—¬, λ³Έ 발λͺ…은 λ…Έ μ‹œκ·Έλ„ 단계와 μ†ŒμŠ€ 선택 단계가 μ‹œκ°μ μœΌλ‘œ κ΅¬λΆ„λ˜μ§€ μ•ŠλŠ”λ‹€. In the electronic device 1 according to an embodiment, the UI screen of FIG. 7 may be continuously displayed without separating/discriminating a no signal situation and a source selection situation of the electronic device 1 . In other words, in contrast to the related art in which the screen is switched when a source menu is selected on the no-signal screen or a specific source is connected to the interface 110, in the present invention, the no-signal step and the source selection step are not visually distinguished. .

예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, μ™ΈλΆ€μž…λ ₯μœΌλ‘œμ„œ μ†Œμ • μ†ŒμŠ€κ°€ 선택 λ˜λŠ” μ—°κ²°λ˜κΈ° μ „, μ „μžμž₯치(1)κ°€ 졜초둜 μ„€μΉ˜ λ˜λŠ” 전원 μ—°κ²°λ˜λŠ” λ•Œ, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)μ—λŠ” μ΄ˆκΈ°ν™”λ©΄μœΌλ‘œμ„œ, 도 7에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, μ—°κ²° κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ μ†ŒμŠ€μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©(401, 402, 403, 404, 405)이 λΆ€μœ , 즉, ν™”λ©΄ λ‚΄μ—μ„œ μ›€μ§μ΄λŠ” UI 화면이 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ  수 μžˆλ‹€. μ—¬κΈ°μ„œ, UI 화면은, 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©(401, 402, 403, 404, 405)이 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 일 μœ„μΉ˜, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, μ€‘μ•™μ—μ„œ 반볡적/μ§€μ†μ μœΌλ‘œ λΆ„μΆœ, 즉, 흘러 λ‚˜μ˜€λŠ” ν˜•νƒœμ˜ μ• λ‹ˆλ©”μ΄μ…˜μœΌλ‘œ 루핑(looping) μž¬μƒλ  수 μžˆλ‹€.For example, before a predetermined source is selected or connected as an external input, when the electronic device 1 is first installed or connected to power, the display 110 is an initial screen, as shown in FIG. 7 , a connectable source A plurality of menu items 401, 402, 403, 404, and 405 corresponding to are floating, that is, a UI screen that moves within the screen may be displayed. Here, the UI screen is an animation in which a plurality of menu items 401, 402, 403, 404, and 405 are repeatedly/continuously ejected from one position of the display 110, for example, from the center, that is, flowing out. Looping can be played.

μ‚¬μš©μžλŠ”, 도 7와 같이 UI 화면이 ν‘œμ‹œ, 즉, μž¬μƒλ˜λŠ” μƒνƒœμ—μ„œ, μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯λΆ€(130)λ₯Ό μ΄μš©ν•˜μ—¬ 메뉴항λͺ©λ“€(401, 402, 403, 404, 405) 쀑 μ–΄λŠ ν•˜λ‚˜(405)λ₯Ό μ„ νƒν•¨μœΌλ‘œμ¨, μ „μžμž₯치(1)와 μ—°κ²°λ˜λŠ” μ†ŒμŠ€λ₯Ό 선택할 수 μžˆλ‹€.The user selects any one 405 of the menu items 401, 402, 403, 404, and 405 using the user input unit 130 while the UI screen is displayed, that is, reproduced as shown in FIG. , a source connected to the electronic device 1 may be selected.

도 8을 μ°Έμ‘°ν•˜λ©΄, 상기와 같이 μ–΄λŠ ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ μ†ŒμŠ€, 즉, μ—°κ²°ν•˜κ³ μž ν•˜λŠ” μ†ŒμŠ€μ˜ 메뉴항λͺ©(405)에 λŒ€ν•œ μ‚¬μš©μžμ˜ 선택이 μˆ˜μ‹ λ¨μ— κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, μ„ νƒλœ 메뉴항λͺ©(405, 406, 407)을 점차둜 ν™•λŒ€ν•˜μ—¬ ν‘œμ‹œν•˜λ„λ‘ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. Referring to FIG. 8 , as described above, based on the user's selection of the menu item 405 of any one source, that is, the source to be connected, the processor 170 generates the selected menu items 405 and 406 . , 407 may be gradually enlarged to display the control display 110 .

ꡬ체적으둜, ν•΄λ‹Ή 메뉴항λͺ©(405, 406, 407)μ—λŠ”, 도 8에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, 이λ₯Έ λ°” 쀌인(zoom in) μ• λ‹ˆλ©”μ΄μ…˜ νš¨κ³Όκ°€ μ μš©λ˜μ–΄ 메뉴항λͺ©(405, 406, 407)이 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 ν™”λ©΄ μ „μ²΄λ‘œ 점차 ν™•λŒ€λ˜λ©΄μ„œ, μ „μžμž₯치(1)κ°€ μ„ νƒλœ 메뉴항λͺ©(405, 406, 407)에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” μ†ŒμŠ€μ™€ μœ μ„  λ˜λŠ” 무선 연결될 수 μžˆλ‹€. ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” μ—°κ²°λœ μ†ŒμŠ€λ‘œλΆ€ν„° μΈν„°νŽ˜μ΄μŠ€λΆ€(120)λ₯Ό 톡해 μ‹ ν˜Έλ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹ ν•˜λ©°, 그에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” μ˜μƒ(408)이 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)에 ν‘œμ‹œλ  수 μžˆλ‹€.Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8 , a so-called zoom in animation effect is applied to the corresponding menu items 405 , 406 , and 407 so that the menu items 405 , 406 , 407 are displayed on the display 110 . As the screen is gradually enlarged, the electronic device 1 may be connected to a source corresponding to the selected menu items 405 , 406 , and 407 by wire or wirelessly. The processor 170 may receive a signal from the connected source through the interface unit 120 , and an image 408 corresponding thereto may be displayed on the display 110 .

그에 따라, 상기와 같은 λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ”, μ—°κ²°λœ μ†ŒμŠ€κ°€ μ—†λŠ” λ…Έ μ‹œκ·Έλ„ μƒνƒœλ‘œλΆ€ν„°, μ‚¬μš©μžκ°€ μ›ν•˜λŠ” μ†ŒμŠ€λ₯Ό μ„ νƒν•˜κ³ , ν•΄λ‹Ή μ†ŒμŠ€λ‘œλΆ€ν„° μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό μˆ˜μ‹ ν•˜μ—¬ μ œκ³΅ν•˜κΈ°κΉŒμ§€, μ‹œκ°μ μΈ λ‹¨μ ˆ 없이, μ‚¬μš©μžμ—κ²Œ μ‹¬λ¦¬μŠ€(seamless)ν•œ κ²½ν—˜μ„ μžμ—°μŠ€λŸ½κ²Œ μ œκ³΅ν•  수 μžˆλ„λ‘ κ΅¬ν˜„λœλ‹€.Accordingly, the electronic device 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention as described above, from a no-signal state without a connected source, selects a source desired by the user, receives the content from the source, and provides the It is implemented so that a seamless experience can be naturally provided to users without interruption.

λ³Έ 발λͺ… μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ 쑰건정보에 따라 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110) μƒμ—μ„œ UI의 λ ˆμ΄μ•„μ›ƒ(layout)이 λ‹€λ₯΄κ²Œ ν‘œμ‹œλ˜λ„λ‘ ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. 즉, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ” 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ UI의 λ ˆμ΄μ•„μ›ƒμ΄ λ³€ν™”λ˜λ„λ‘ ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. μ—¬κΈ°μ„œ, UI의 λ ˆμ΄μ•„μ›ƒμ€, 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λ‚˜, ν•œμ •λ˜μ§€ μ•ŠλŠ”λ‹€. λ˜ν•œ, μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λŠ” λ‹€μ–‘ν•˜κ²Œ 섀정될 수 있으며, μΌλ‘€λ‘œ, μ „μˆ ν•œ 바와 같이, UI에 λŒ€ν•œ λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.According to an embodiment of the present invention, the electronic device 1 may display a different UI layout on the display 110 according to various condition information. That is, the electronic device 1 may change the layout of the UI based on the condition information. Here, the layout of the UI includes, but is not limited to, an arrangement direction of a plurality of menu items. In addition, the condition information may be set in various ways, and, for example, as described above, may include direction identification condition information for the UI.

도 9, 도 10 및 도 11은 λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜μ—μ„œ μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λ‘œμ„œ μž…λ ₯μˆ˜λ‹¨μ˜ μ’…λ₯˜μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ UIλ₯Ό λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄ν•˜λŠ” μ˜ˆλ“€μ„ λ„μ‹œν•œ 도면이닀.9, 10, and 11 are diagrams illustrating examples of displaying a UI in response to a type of input means as condition information in an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UI에 κ΄€ν•œ λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보λ₯Ό νšλ“ν•˜κ³ , νšλ“λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ UI 의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 μ‹λ³„ν•˜κ³ , κ·Έ μ‹λ³„λœ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 UI의 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ λ°°μ—΄λ˜λ„λ‘ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the processor 170 obtains direction identification condition information regarding a UI including a plurality of menu items, identifies an arrangement direction of the UI based on the obtained condition information, and arranges the identified UI The display 110 may be controlled so that a plurality of menu items of the UI are arranged in the direction.

μ—¬κΈ°μ„œ, λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λŠ” μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯이 μˆ˜μ‹  κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ μž…λ ₯μˆ˜λ‹¨μ˜ μ’…λ₯˜λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. Here, the direction identification condition information may include a type of input means capable of receiving a user input.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆλ‘œμ„œ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯λΆ€(130), λ‹€μ‹œ 말해, μ‚¬μš©μž μž…λ ₯을 μˆ˜μ‹ ν•˜λŠ” μž…λ ₯μˆ˜λ‹¨μ˜ μ’…λ₯˜ λ³„λ‘œ 그에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 μ‹λ³„ν•˜κ³ , κ·Έ μ‹λ³„λœ λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ λ°°μ—΄λ˜κ²Œ UIλ₯Ό λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. μž…λ ₯μˆ˜λ‹¨μ˜ μ’…λ₯˜ 별 UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯은, ν•΄λ‹Ή μž…λ ₯μˆ˜λ‹¨μ„ μ‚¬μš© μ‹œ, μ‚¬μš©μž μž…λ ₯μ΄λ‚˜ μž…λ ₯ 결과의 확인에 μžˆμ–΄ μ‚¬μš©μžμ—κ²Œ 보닀 μš©μ΄ν•œ μ†Œμ •λ°©ν–₯μœΌλ‘œμ„œ, λ””ν΄νŠΈλ‘œ 미리 μ„€μ • λ˜λŠ” μ‚¬μš©μžμ— μ˜ν•΄ μ„€μ •λ˜μ–΄, μ €μž₯λΆ€(140)에 μ €μž₯될 수 μžˆλ‹€. As an embodiment, the processor 170 identifies the arrangement direction of the UI corresponding thereto for each type of the user input unit 130 , that is, input means for receiving the user input, and a plurality of menus in the identified arrangement direction. The UI can be displayed so that the items are arranged. The arrangement direction of the UI for each type of input means is a predetermined direction that is easier for the user to check the user input or input result when using the input means, and is preset by default or set by the user, 140) can be stored.

예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, 도 9에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯λΆ€(130)λ‘œμ„œ 리λͺ¨μ»¨(201)이 μ‚¬μš©λ˜λŠ” 경우, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©(501, 502, 503)이 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110) μƒμ—μ„œ κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 λ°°μ—΄λ˜λ„λ‘ UIλ₯Ό λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. μ—¬κΈ°μ„œ, 각 메뉴항λͺ©(501, 502, 503)은 컨텐츠λ₯Ό μ œκ³΅ν•˜λŠ” μ†ŒμŠ€μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” 것을 μΌλ‘€λ‘œ ν•˜μ§€λ§Œ, ν•œμ •λ˜λŠ” 것은 μ•„λ‹ˆλ‹€.For example, as shown in FIG. 9 , when the remote control 201 is used as the user input unit 130 , the processor 170 displays a plurality of menu items 501 , 502 , and 503 horizontally on the display 110 . The UI can be displayed to be arranged in a direction. Here, each of the menu items 501 , 502 , and 503 corresponds to a source providing content as an example, but is not limited thereto.

ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, μ‚¬μš©μžκ°€ 리λͺ¨μ»¨(201)을 μ΄μš©ν•˜μ—¬ κ°€λ‘œ λ°©ν–₯으둜 λ°°μ—΄λœ 메뉴항λͺ©(501, 502, 503) μ€‘μ—μ„œ μ–΄λŠ ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ ν•­λͺ©(501)을 μ„ νƒν•˜λ©΄, 도 9와 같이, μ„ νƒλœ ν•­λͺ©(501)이 크기, ν˜•μƒ, 색상 쀑 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ— μ˜ν•΄ μ‹λ³„λ˜κ²Œ ν‘œμ‹œλ˜λ„λ‘ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.When the user selects any one item 501 from among the menu items 501 , 502 , and 503 arranged in the horizontal direction using the remote control 201 , the processor 170 , as shown in FIG. 9 , the selected item 501 . ) may be controlled to be displayed to be identified by at least one of a size, a shape, and a color.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UIκ°€ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λœ μƒνƒœμ—μ„œ, μ–΄λŠ ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ μ„ νƒν•˜λŠ” μ‚¬μš©μž μž…λ ₯이 μˆ˜μ‹ λ˜λ©΄, κ·Έ μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯λΆ€(130), λ‹€μ‹œ 말해, μ‚¬μš©μž μž…λ ₯을 μˆ˜μ‹ ν•˜λŠ” μž…λ ₯μˆ˜λ‹¨μ˜ μ’…λ₯˜μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ UI의 λ ˆμ΄μ•„μ›ƒμ΄ λ³€ν™”λ˜μ–΄ ν‘œμ‹œλ˜λ„λ‘ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. In an embodiment, when a user input for selecting any one menu item is received while a UI including a plurality of menu items is displayed, the processor 170 is configured to the user input unit 130 , that is, the user The display 110 may be controlled so that the layout of the UI is changed and displayed according to the type of input means for receiving the input.

예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, 도 10에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, μ†ŒμŠ€μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©(601, 603, 604)이 λΆ€μœ ν•˜λŠ” μž…μžμ˜ ν˜•νƒœλ‘œ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λœ μƒνƒœμ—μ„œ, μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯λΆ€(130)λ‘œμ„œ λ§ˆμ΄ν¬μ™€ 같은 μŒμ„±μž…λ ₯λΆ€(205)λ₯Ό 톡해 μ–΄λŠ ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ ν•­λͺ©(601)을 μ„ νƒν•˜λŠ” μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯이 μˆ˜μ‹ λ  수 μžˆλ‹€. ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 도 10κ³Ό 같이, μ„ νƒλœ ν•­λͺ©(601)이 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 μ†Œμ • μœ„μΉ˜, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, μ€‘μ•™μœΌλ‘œ μ΄λ™ν•˜λ©΄μ„œ, μ΄λ™λœ ν•­λͺ©(602)이 쀌인, λ‹€μ‹œ 말해, 점차둜 ν™•λŒ€λ˜μ–΄ ν‘œμ‹œλ˜λ„λ‘ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.For example, as shown in FIG. 10 , in a state in which a plurality of menu items 601 , 603 , and 604 corresponding to a source are displayed in the form of floating particles, the user input unit 130 is a voice input unit such as a microphone. A user input for selecting any one item 601 may be received through 205 . As shown in FIG. 10 , the processor 170 displays the moved item 602 zoomed in, that is, gradually enlarged, while the selected item 601 is moved to a predetermined position, for example, the center of the display 110 . The display 110 may be controlled so as to be possible.

λ‹€λ₯Έ μ˜ˆλ‘œμ„œ, 도 11에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, μ†ŒμŠ€μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©(701, 702, 703, 704)이 λΆ€μœ ν•˜λŠ” μž…μžμ˜ ν˜•νƒœλ‘œ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λœ μƒνƒœμ—μ„œ, μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯λΆ€(130)λ‘œμ„œ μ‚¬μš©μžμ˜ μ†μ˜ μ›€μ§μž„, λ‹€μ‹œ 말해, 제슀처λ₯Ό κ°μ§€ν•˜λŠ” λͺ¨μ…˜κ°μ§€λΆ€(240)κ°€ μ‚¬μš©λ  수 μžˆλ‹€.As another example, as shown in FIG. 11 , in a state in which a plurality of menu items 701 , 702 , 703 , 704 corresponding to the source are displayed in the form of floating particles, the user's hand as the user input unit 130 The motion detection unit 240 for detecting the movement, that is, a gesture, may be used.

ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, μ œμŠ€μ²˜μž…λ ₯에 λŒ€ν•œ 트리거 ν”Όλ“œλ°±μ„ μ œκ³΅ν•˜λ„λ‘ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. 트리거 ν”Όλ“œλ°±μ˜ μ’…λ₯˜λŠ” ν•œμ •λ˜μ§€ μ•ŠμœΌλ©°, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, μ œμŠ€μ²˜μž…λ ₯을 λ‚˜νƒ€λ‚΄λŠ” μ•„μ΄μ½˜μ„ 포함할 수 있으며, μ•„μ΄μ½˜μ—λŠ” μ• λ‹ˆλ©”μ΄μ…˜ νš¨κ³Όκ°€ 적용될 수 μžˆλ‹€.The processor 170 may control the display 110 to provide trigger feedback for the gesture input. The type of trigger feedback is not limited, and for example, an icon indicating a gesture input may be included, and an animation effect may be applied to the icon.

ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 트리거 ν”Όλ“œλ°± 제곡 ν›„, 도 11에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, λͺ¨μ…˜κ°μ§€λΆ€(240)λ₯Ό 톡해 κ°μ§€λ˜λŠ” μ†μ˜ μ›€μ§μž„ μœ„μΉ˜μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ 이동 κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ κ°€μƒμ˜ 포인터(704)κ°€ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110) 상에 ν‘œμ‹œλ˜λ„λ‘ ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. 포인터(704)의 ν˜•μƒμ€ ν•œμ •λ˜μ§€ μ•ŠμœΌλ©°, μΌλ‘€λ‘œ 도 11κ³Ό 같이 제슀처 μž…λ ₯에 λŒ€ν•œ 즉각적인 ν”Όλ“œλ°±μ΄ κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜λ„λ‘ 손을 ν˜•μƒν™”ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.The processor 170, after providing the trigger feedback, as shown in FIG. 11 , a virtual pointer 704 that is movable in response to the position of the hand movement sensed through the motion detection unit 240 is displayed on the display 110 . can be displayed in The shape of the pointer 704 is not limited, and as an example, as shown in FIG. 11 , a hand may be shaped to enable immediate feedback on a gesture input.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©(701, 702, 703, 704) 쀑 포인터(704)에 κ·Όμ ‘ν•œ ν•­λͺ©(701)이 포인터(704)에 λ§žλ‹ΏλŠ” μ• λ‹ˆλ©”μ΄μ…˜ νš¨κ³Όκ°€ 적용될 수 μžˆλ‹€. μ‚¬μš©μžλ‘œλΆ€ν„° 상기와 같이 포인터(704)에 달라뢙은 κ·Όμ ‘ ν•­λͺ©(701)을 μ„ νƒν•˜λŠ” μ œμŠ€μ²˜κ°€ μž…λ ₯되면, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 도 11κ³Ό 같이, μ„ νƒλœ ν•­λͺ©(701)이 쀌인, λ‹€μ‹œ 말해, 점차둜 ν™•λŒ€λ˜μ–΄ ν‘œμ‹œλ˜λ„λ‘ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the processor 170 may apply an animation effect in which an item 701 close to the pointer 704 from among the plurality of menu items 701 , 702 , 703 , and 704 abuts against the pointer 704 . When a gesture for selecting the proximity item 701 stuck to the pointer 704 is input from the user as described above, the processor 170 zooms in, that is, gradually enlarges the selected item 701 as shown in FIG. The display 110 may be controlled to be displayed.

상기와 같은 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯΄λ©΄, μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ”, μž…λ ₯μˆ˜λ‹¨μ˜ μ’…λ₯˜μ— 따라 UI의 λ ˆμ΄μ•„μ›ƒμ„ λ³€κ²½ν•˜μ—¬ ν‘œμ‹œν•¨μœΌλ‘œμ¨, μ‚¬μš©μžμ—κ²Œ 즉각적인 ν”Όλ“œλ°±μ„ μ œκ³΅ν•  수 있게 λœλ‹€.According to the above embodiment, the electronic device 1 can provide immediate feedback to the user by changing and displaying the UI layout according to the type of input means.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, UI의 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ€ 제1메뉴항λͺ©κ³Ό, 제1메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ ν•˜μœ„ 계측인 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ 제2메뉴항λͺ©μ„ 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€. λ‹€μ‹œ 말해, UIλŠ” 메인메뉴와 μ„œλΈŒλ©”λ‰΄(λ“€)둜 이루어진 계측 ꡬ쑰λ₯Ό κ°€μ§ˆ 수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the plurality of menu items of the UI may include a first menu item and at least one second menu item that is a lower layer of the first menu item. In other words, the UI may have a hierarchical structure consisting of a main menu and sub-menu(s).

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, UI에 κ΄€ν•œ λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λ‘œμ„œ 제1메뉴항λͺ©κ³Ό 제2메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄νŠΉμ„±μ— κ΄€ν•œ 정보λ₯Ό νšλ“ν•˜κ³ , νšλ“λœ 쑰건정보, 즉, 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄νŠΉμ„±μ— κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ UI 의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 μ‹λ³„ν•˜κ³ , κ·Έ μ‹λ³„λœ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 UI의 메뉴항λͺ©λ“€μ΄ λ°°μ—΄λ˜λ„λ‘ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄νŠΉμ„±μ€, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, 계측방ν–₯의 νŠΉμ„± λ˜λŠ” ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯의 νŠΉμ„±μ„ 포함할 수 μžˆμœΌλ‚˜, ν•œμ •λ˜λŠ” 것은 μ•„λ‹ˆλ‹€.In one embodiment, the processor 170 obtains information about the arrangement characteristics of the first menu item and the second menu item as direction identification condition information about the UI, and obtains the obtained condition information, that is, the arrangement characteristics of the menu items. It is possible to identify the arrangement direction of the UI based on the , and control the display 110 so that menu items of the UI are arranged in the identified arrangement direction of the UI. The arrangement characteristic of the menu item may include, for example, a characteristic of a hierarchical direction or a characteristic of an item direction, but is not limited thereto.

도 12와 도 13은 λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜μ—μ„œ 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄νŠΉμ„±μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ UIλ₯Ό λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄ν•˜λŠ” μ˜ˆλ“€μ„ λ„μ‹œν•œ 도면이닀.12 and 13 are diagrams illustrating examples of displaying a UI in response to an arrangement characteristic of a menu item in an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄νŠΉμ„±μœΌλ‘œμ„œ, 계측방ν–₯(κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯)의 길이가 ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯(μ„Έλ‘œλ°©ν–₯)의 길이보닀 큰 경우, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 계측방ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the processor 170, as an arrangement characteristic of menu items, when the length of the hierarchical direction (horizontal direction) is greater than the length of the item direction (vertical direction), the processor 170 sets the arrangement direction of the UI in the horizontal direction corresponding to the hierarchical direction. can be identified as

λ‹€λ₯Έ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 계측방ν–₯의 λ©”λ‰΄μ˜ 단계 μˆ˜κ°€ 제1κΈ°μ€€κ°’ 이상인 경우, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€. 제1기쀀값은, 예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, 3으둜 섀정될 수 μžˆμœΌλ‚˜, ν•œμ •λ˜λŠ” 것은 μ•„λ‹ˆλ‹€.In another embodiment, when the number of steps in the menu in the hierarchical direction is equal to or greater than the first reference value, the processor 170 may identify the arrangement direction of the UI as a horizontal direction. The first reference value may be, for example, set to 3, but is not limited thereto.

μΌλ‘€λ‘œ, 도 12에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, UIκ°€ 메인메뉴(801, 802), 제1μ„œλΈŒλ©”λ‰΄(803, 804, 805), 제2μ„œλΈŒλ©”λ‰΄(806, 807)λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” 3개 μ΄μƒμ˜ λ‹¨κ³„μ˜ 계측 ꡬ쑰둜 이루어진 경우, UIλŠ” κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 배열될 수 μžˆλ‹€. 그에 따라, μ‚¬μš©μžλŠ” 각 λ‹¨κ³„μ—μ„œ 리λͺ¨μ»¨(201)κ³Ό 같은 μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯λΆ€(130)λ₯Ό μ‘°μž‘ν•˜μ—¬ ν¬μΈνŒ… μ»€μ„œλ₯Ό 톡해 ν•­λͺ©λ“€(802, 805, 807)을 ν•œλˆˆμ— ν™•μΈν•˜λ©΄μ„œ 선택할 수 μžˆλ‹€. For example, as shown in FIG. 12 , the UI includes the main menu 801, 802, the first sub-menu 803, 804, 805, and the second sub-menu 806, 807 of three or more steps. In the case of a hierarchical structure, the UI may be arranged in a horizontal direction. Accordingly, the user may select the items 802 , 805 , and 807 at a glance through the pointing cursor by operating the user input unit 130 such as the remote control 201 in each step.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄νŠΉμ„±μœΌλ‘œμ„œ ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯(μ„Έλ‘œλ°©ν–₯)의 길이가 계측방ν–₯(κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯)의 길이보닀 큰 경우, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ μ„Έλ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, when the length of the item direction (vertical direction) is greater than the length of the hierarchical direction (horizontal direction) as the arrangement characteristic of the menu items, the processor 170 sets the arrangement direction of the UI in the vertical direction corresponding to the item direction. can be identified.

λ‹€λ₯Έ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯의 λ©”λ‰΄μ˜ κ°œμˆ˜κ°€ 제2κΈ°μ€€κ°’ 이상인 경우, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 μ„Έλ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€. 제2기쀀값은, 예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, 8둜 섀정될 수 μžˆμœΌλ‚˜, ν•œμ •λ˜λŠ” 것은 μ•„λ‹ˆλ‹€.In another embodiment, when the number of menus in the item direction is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the processor 170 may identify the arrangement direction of the UI as a vertical direction. The second reference value may be, for example, set to 8, but is not limited thereto.

μΌλ‘€λ‘œ, 도 13에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, UIκ°€ 메인메뉴(901, 902)와 μ„œλΈŒλ©”λ‰΄(903, 904, 905)λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λ©°, ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯의 λ©”λ‰΄μ˜ κ°œμˆ˜λ‘œμ„œ μ„œλΈŒλ©”λ‰΄(903, 904, 905)κ°€ 8개 μ΄μƒμ˜ 개수둜 이루어진 경우, UIλŠ” μ„Έλ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 배열될 수 μžˆλ‹€. 그에 따라, μ‚¬μš©μžλŠ” λ§Žμ€ 개수의 μ„œλΈŒλ©”λ‰΄μ˜ ν•­λͺ©λ“€(903, 904, 905)을 ν•œλˆˆμ— ν™•μΈν•˜λ©΄μ„œ, 리λͺ¨μ»¨(201)κ³Ό 같은 μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯λΆ€(130)λ₯Ό μ‘°μž‘ν•˜μ—¬ ν¬μΈνŒ… μ»€μ„œλ₯Ό μ΄λ™μ‹œμΌœ, 선택이 μš©μ΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.For example, as shown in FIG. 13 , the UI includes main menus 901 and 902 and submenus 903 , 904 and 905 , and submenus 903 , 904 , 905 as the number of menus in the item direction. When is composed of 8 or more, the UI may be arranged in the vertical direction. Accordingly, the user can move the pointing cursor by manipulating the user input unit 130 such as the remote control 201 while checking a large number of items 903, 904, and 905 of the sub-menu at a glance to make selection easier. can

ν•œνŽΈ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, ν‘œμ‹œν•˜κ³ μž ν•˜λŠ” UI의 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ ꡬ성이, 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄νŠΉμ„±μœΌλ‘œμ„œ 미리 μ„€μ •λœ 계측방ν–₯의 νŠΉμ„± λ˜λŠ” ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯의 νŠΉμ„±μ— λΆ€ν•©ν•˜μ§€ μ•ŠλŠ” 경우, 예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, 계측방ν–₯의 길이와 ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯의 길이가 동일 λ˜λŠ” κ·Έ 차이가 미리 μ •ν•΄μ§„ λ²”μœ„ μ΄λ‚΄μ΄κ±°λ‚˜, λ˜λŠ” 계측방ν–₯의 λ©”λ‰΄μ˜ 단계 μˆ˜κ°€ 제1κΈ°μ€€κ°’ 미만이고, ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯의 λ©”λ‰΄μ˜ κ°œμˆ˜κ°€μ œ2κΈ°μ€€κ°’ 미만인 경우, 미리 μ •ν•΄μ§„ λ””ν΄νŠΈ λ°©ν–₯, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ 메뉴항λͺ©λ“€μ΄ λ°°μ—΄λœ UIκ°€ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ˜λ„λ‘ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.On the other hand, if the configuration of the plurality of menu items of the UI to be displayed does not match the hierarchical direction characteristic or the item direction characteristic preset as an arrangement characteristic of the menu items, for example, the hierarchical direction If the length of the item direction is the same or the difference is within a predetermined range, or the number of levels of the menu in the hierarchical direction is less than the first reference value and the number of menus in the item direction is less than the second reference value, the predetermined default direction , for example, the display 110 may be controlled to display a UI in which menu items are arranged in a horizontal direction.

도 14λŠ” λ³Έ 발λͺ… λ‹€λ₯Έ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ˜ μ „μžμž₯치의 μ œμ–΄ λ™μž‘μ„ λ„μ‹œν•œ 도면이닀.14 is a diagram illustrating a control operation of an electronic device according to another embodiment of the present invention.

도 14의 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆλŠ”, 도 6의 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ™€ λΉ„κ΅ν•˜μ—¬, μ „μžμž₯치(1)κ°€ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ μ‹λ³„λœ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯이 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 ν˜„μž¬ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œμ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ”μ§€ μ—¬λΆ€λ₯Ό 더 μ‹λ³„ν•˜μ—¬, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œμ—μ„œ 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ λ°°μ—΄λ˜κ²Œ UIλ₯Ό λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄ν•˜λ„λ‘ κ΅¬ν˜„λœλ‹€.In the embodiment of FIG. 14 , as compared with the embodiment of FIG. 6 , the electronic device 1 further identifies whether the arrangement direction of the UI identified based on the condition information corresponds to the current screen mode of the display 110 . , is implemented to display the UI such that a plurality of menu items are arranged in a screen mode corresponding to the arrangement direction of the UI.

ꡬ체적으둜, μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 도 14에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UI에 κ΄€ν•œ λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보λ₯Ό νšλ“ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€(1201). μ—¬κΈ°μ„œ, λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λŠ” 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄νŠΉμ„±, μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯이 μˆ˜μ‹  κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ μž…λ ₯μˆ˜λ‹¨μ˜ μ’…λ₯˜, μ‚¬μš©μžμ˜ μ„ ν˜Έλ„, νžˆμŠ€ν† λ¦¬ 정보 쀑 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 , the processor 170 of the electronic device 1 may obtain direction identification condition information regarding a UI including a plurality of menu items ( 1201 ). Here, the direction identification condition information may include at least one of an arrangement characteristic of menu items, a type of input means capable of receiving a user input, a user's preference, and history information.

ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 단계 1201μ—μ„œ νšλ“λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€(1202).The processor 170 may identify the arrangement direction of the UI based on the condition information obtained in step 1201 ( 1202 ).

예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보가 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄νŠΉμ„±μ΄κ³ , 계측방ν–₯의 길이가 ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯의 길이보닀 큰 경우, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯은 계측방ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 식별될 수 μžˆλ‹€. λ˜ν•œ, 도 12에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, UIκ°€ 메인메뉴(801, 802), 제1μ„œλΈŒλ©”λ‰΄(803, 804, 805), 제2μ„œλΈŒλ©”λ‰΄(806, 807)λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜μ—¬, 계측방ν–₯의 λ©”λ‰΄μ˜ κ°œμˆ˜κ°€ 제1κΈ°μ€€κ°’ 이상인 계측 ꡬ쑰둜 이루어진 경우, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯은 κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 식별될 수 μžˆλ‹€.For example, when the direction identification condition information is an arrangement characteristic of a menu item and the length of the hierarchical direction is greater than the length of the item direction, the arrangement direction of the UI may be identified as a horizontal direction corresponding to the hierarchical direction. In addition, as shown in Fig. 12, the UI includes the main menus 801, 802, the first sub-menus 803, 804, 805, and the second sub-menus 806, 807. When the number is formed of a hierarchical structure equal to or greater than the first reference value, the arrangement direction of the UI may be identified as a horizontal direction.

λ‹€λ₯Έ μ˜ˆλ‘œμ„œ, λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보가 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄νŠΉμ„±μ΄κ³ , ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯의 길이가 계측방ν–₯의 길이보닀 큰 경우, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯은 ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ μ„Έλ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 식별될 수 μžˆλ‹€. λ˜ν•œ, 도 13에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, UIκ°€ 메인메뉴(901, 902)와 μ„œλΈŒλ©”λ‰΄(903, 904, 905)λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λ©°, ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯의 λ©”λ‰΄μ˜ κ°œμˆ˜λ‘œμ„œ μ„œλΈŒλ©”λ‰΄(903, 904, 905)κ°€ 제2κΈ°μ€€κ°’ μ΄μƒμ˜ 개수둜 이루어진 경우, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯은 μ„Έλ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 식별될 수 μžˆλ‹€.As another example, when the direction identification condition information is an arrangement characteristic of a menu item and the length of the item direction is greater than the length of the hierarchical direction, the arrangement direction of the UI may be identified as a vertical direction corresponding to the item direction. Also, as shown in Fig. 13, the UI includes main menus 901, 902 and sub-menus 903, 904, and 905, and as the number of menus in the item direction, sub-menus 903, 904, and 905 are When the number is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the arrangement direction of the UI may be identified as a vertical direction.

ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170), λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 ν˜„μž¬ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ₯Ό 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€(1203). 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 ν˜„μž¬ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œκ°€ κ°€λ‘œλͺ¨λ“œ(landscape mode)인지, λ˜λŠ” μ„Έλ‘œλͺ¨λ“œ(portrait mode)인지 μ—¬λΆ€λ₯Ό 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€.A current screen mode of the processor 170 and the display 110 may be identified ( 1203 ). For example, the processor 170 may identify whether the current screen mode of the display 110 is a landscape mode or a portrait mode.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 해상도 정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬, ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ₯Ό 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€. 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, μ €μž₯λΆ€(140)λ‘œλΆ€ν„° EDIDλ₯Ό 읽음으둜써, ν˜„μž¬ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œμ— κ΄€ν•œ 정보λ₯Ό νšλ“ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.In an embodiment, the processor 170 may identify the screen mode based on the resolution information of the display 110 . For example, the processor 170 may acquire information about the current screen mode by reading the EDID from the storage unit 140 .

λ‹€λ₯Έ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, λ°©ν–₯감지뢀(160)λ‘œλΆ€ν„° λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 νšŒμ „μƒνƒœμ— κ΄€ν•œ 정보λ₯Ό νšλ“ν•¨μœΌλ‘œμ¨, ν˜„μž¬ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ₯Ό 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€.In another embodiment, the processor 170 may identify the current screen mode by obtaining information about the rotation state of the display 110 from the direction sensing unit 160 .

ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” 단계 1202μ—μ„œ μ‹λ³„λœ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯κ³Ό 단계 1203μ—μ„œ μ‹λ³„λœ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œκ°€ λŒ€μ‘, λ‹€μ‹œ 말해, 맀치(match)λ˜λŠ”μ§€ μ—¬λΆ€λ₯Ό 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€(1204). The processor 170 may identify whether the arrangement direction of the UI identified in step 1202 and the screen mode of the display 110 identified in step 1203 correspond, that is, match ( 1204 ).

ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯κ³Ό ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œκ°€ λŒ€μ‘λ˜μ§€ μ•ŠλŠ” κ²ƒμœΌλ‘œ μ‹λ³„λœ 경우, 예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, 단계 1202μ—μ„œ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯이 κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 μ‹λ³„λ˜κ³ , 단계 1203μ—μ„œ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œκ°€ μ„Έλ‘œλͺ¨λ“œλ‘œ μ‹λ³„λœ 경우(단계 1204μ—μ„œ NO), 단계 1203μ—μ„œ μ‹λ³„λœ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)κ°€ νšŒμ „ν•˜λ„λ‘ ꡬ동뢀(150)λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€(1205). 예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯이 κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 μ‹λ³„λœ 경우, μ„Έλ‘œλͺ¨λ“œμΈ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λŠ”, 도 1 λ‚΄μ§€ 도 3μ—μ„œ μ„€λͺ…ν•œ 바와 같이, ꡬ동뢀(150)에 μ˜ν•΄ μ‹œκ³„λ°©ν–₯ λ˜λŠ” λ°˜μ‹œκ³„λ°©ν–₯으둜 νšŒμ „λ˜μ–΄ κ°€λ‘œλͺ¨λ“œλ‘œ μ „ν™˜λ  수 μžˆλ‹€.When it is identified that the arrangement direction of the UI and the screen mode do not correspond to the processor 170, for example, the arrangement direction of the UI is identified as the horizontal direction in step 1202, and the screen mode of the display 110 in step 1203 When is identified in the portrait mode (NO in step 1204), the driving unit 150 may be controlled to rotate the display 110 in response to the arrangement direction of the UI identified in step 1203 ( 1205 ). For example, when the arrangement direction of the UI is identified in the horizontal direction, the display 110 in the vertical mode is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving unit 150 as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3 . Can be switched to landscape mode.

그리고, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 단계 1205μ—μ„œ νšŒμ „λœ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110) 상에, 단계 1205μ—μ„œ μ‹λ³„λœ λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 UI의 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ λ°°μ—΄λ˜λ„λ‘ μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€(1206). 그에 따라, 단계 1202μ—μ„œ μ‹λ³„λœ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œμ˜ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)에 UIλ₯Ό λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄ν•  수 있게 λœλ‹€.Then, the processor 170 may control the plurality of menu items of the UI to be arranged in the arrangement direction identified in step 1205 on the display 110 rotated in step 1205 ( 1206 ). Accordingly, the UI can be displayed on the display 110 in the screen mode corresponding to the arrangement direction of the UI identified in step 1202 .

상기와 같은 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œλŠ”, μ „μžμž₯치(1)κ°€, 제1메뉴항λͺ©(메인메뉴항λͺ©)κ³Ό 제2메뉴항λͺ©(μ„œλΈŒλ©”λ‰΄ν•­λͺ©)을 ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄νŠΉμ„±μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 νšŒμ „λͺ¨λ“œλ₯Ό μ „ν™˜ν•˜μ—¬ UIλ₯Ό ν‘œμ‹œν•¨μœΌλ‘œμ¨, μ‚¬μš©μžμ—κ²Œ μ‹œκ°μ  μ•ˆμ •κ°κ³Ό μ‚¬μš©μž μž…λ ₯의 편의λ₯Ό μ œκ³΅ν•  수 있게 λœλ‹€.In the above embodiment, in response to the arrangement characteristics of menu items including the first menu item (main menu item) and the second menu item (sub-menu item), the electronic device 1 displays the display 110 . By displaying the UI by switching the rotation mode, it is possible to provide the user with visual stability and convenience of user input.

도 15λŠ” λ³Έ 발λͺ… 또 λ‹€λ₯Έ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ˜ μ „μžμž₯치의 μ œμ–΄ λ™μž‘μ„ λ„μ‹œν•œ 도면이고, 도 16κ³Ό 도 17은 λ³Έ 발λͺ… 또 λ‹€λ₯Έ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜μ—μ„œ 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄νŠΉμ„±μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ UIλ₯Ό λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄ν•˜λŠ” μ˜ˆλ“€μ„ λ„μ‹œν•œ 도면이닀.15 is a diagram illustrating a control operation of an electronic device according to another embodiment of the present invention, and FIGS. 16 and 17 are examples of displaying a UI in response to an arrangement characteristic of menu items in an electronic device according to another embodiment of the present invention is a diagram showing the

도 15의 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆλŠ”, 도 6의 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ™€ λΉ„κ΅ν•˜μ—¬, μ „μžμž₯치(1)κ°€, 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ μ‹λ³„λœ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ λ°°μ—΄λœ μƒνƒœμ—μ„œ, 쑰건정보 의 λ³€κ²½μ˜ κ°μ§€ν•˜κ³ , λ³€κ²½λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ μ‹λ³„λ˜λŠ” UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ UI의 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ μž¬λ°°μ—΄ν•˜λ„λ‘ κ΅¬ν˜„λœλ‹€.In the embodiment of FIG. 15 , in comparison with the embodiment of FIG. 6 , in the electronic device 1 , in a state in which a plurality of menu items are arranged in the arrangement direction of the UI identified based on the condition information, the change of condition information It is implemented to detect and rearrange a plurality of menu items of the UI in response to the arrangement direction of the UI identified based on the changed condition information.

ꡬ체적으둜, μ „μžμž₯치(1)의 ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 도 15에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UI에 κ΄€ν•œ λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보λ₯Ό νšλ“ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€(1301). μ—¬κΈ°μ„œ, λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λŠ” 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄νŠΉμ„±, μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯이 μˆ˜μ‹  κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ μž…λ ₯μˆ˜λ‹¨μ˜ μ’…λ₯˜, μ‚¬μš©μžμ˜ μ„ ν˜Έλ„, νžˆμŠ€ν† λ¦¬ 정보 쀑 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 , the processor 170 of the electronic device 1 may obtain direction identification condition information regarding a UI including a plurality of menu items ( 1301 ). Here, the direction identification condition information may include at least one of an arrangement characteristic of menu items, a type of input means capable of receiving a user input, a user's preference, and history information.

ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 단계 1301μ—μ„œ νšλ“λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€(1302). μ—¬κΈ°μ„œ, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯은, 도 12와 도 13μ—μ„œ μ„€λͺ…ν•œ 바와 같이 식별될 수 있으며, 예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯ λ˜λŠ” μ„Έλ‘œλ°©ν–₯ 쀑 μ–΄λŠ ν•˜λ‚˜λ‘œ 식별될 수 μžˆλ‹€.The processor 170 may identify the arrangement direction of the UI based on the condition information obtained in step 1301 ( 1302 ). Here, the arrangement direction of the UI may be identified as described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13 , and, for example, may be identified as either a horizontal direction or a vertical direction.

ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 단계 1302μ—μ„œ μ‹λ³„λœ λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 UI의 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ λ°°μ—΄λ˜λ„λ‘ μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€(1303). 예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, 단계 1302μ—μ„œ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯이 κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 μ‹λ³„λœ 경우, 도 16에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©(1401, 1402, 1403, 1404)이 κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 배열될 수 μžˆλ‹€. The processor 170 may control the plurality of menu items of the UI to be arranged in the arrangement direction identified in step 1302 (1303). For example, when the arrangement direction of the UI is identified in the horizontal direction in step 1302 , as shown in FIG. 16 , a plurality of menu items 1401 , 1402 , 1403 , 1404 may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

그에 따라, μ‚¬μš©μžλŠ”, 리λͺ¨μ»¨(201)κ³Ό 같은 μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯λΆ€(130)λ₯Ό μ‘°μž‘ν•˜μ—¬ ν¬μΈνŒ… μ»€μ„œλ₯Ό μ΄λ™μ‹œν‚€λ©΄μ„œ, μ‹λ³„λœ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 λ°°μ—΄λœ 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©(1401, 1402, 1403, 1404)에 λŒ€ν•œ μ‚¬μš©μžμ„ νƒμ„ μž…λ ₯ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.Accordingly, the user manipulates the user input unit 130 such as the remote control 201 to move the pointing cursor, and for a plurality of menu items 1401, 1402, 1403, 1404 arranged in the identified UI arrangement direction. User selection can be entered.

ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, μ‚¬μš©μžμ„ νƒ 등에 μ˜ν•΄ λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보가 λ³€κ²½λ˜λŠ”μ§€ μ—¬λΆ€λ₯Ό 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€(1304). The processor 170 may identify whether the direction identification condition information is changed by a user selection or the like ( 1304 ).

예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, 도 16에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©(1401, 1402, 1403, 1404)λŠ” κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 λ°°μ—΄λœ μƒνƒœμ—μ„œ, μ‚¬μš©μžλŠ” λ©”μΈλ©”λ‰΄μ˜ ν•­λͺ©λ“€ 쀑 제1ν•­λͺ©(1204)을 μ„ νƒν•˜κ³ , κ·Έ μ„œλΈŒλ©”λ‰΄μ˜ ν•­λͺ©λ“€(1403, 1404) 쀑 제2ν•­λͺ©(1403)을 선택할 수 μžˆλ‹€. μ—¬κΈ°μ„œ, 도 17에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, μ„ νƒλœ 제2ν•­λͺ©(1403)의 μ„œλΈŒλ©”λ‰΄κ°€ 제2κΈ°μ€€κ°’ μ΄μƒμ˜ 개수둜 κ΅¬μ„±λœ 경우, λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보가 λ³€κ²½λœ κ²ƒμœΌλ‘œ 식별될 수 μžˆλ‹€.For example, as shown in FIG. 16 , in a state in which the plurality of menu items 1401 , 1402 , 1403 , and 1404 are horizontally arranged, the user selects the first item 1204 from among the items of the main menu. and select the second item 1403 from among the items 1403 and 1404 of the sub-menu. Here, as shown in FIG. 17 , when the sub-menu of the selected second item 1403 has a number equal to or greater than the second reference value, it may be identified that the direction identification condition information has been changed.

단계 1304μ—μ„œ 쑰건정보가 λ³€κ²½λœ κ²ƒμœΌλ‘œ μ‹λ³„λ˜λ©΄(단계 1304μ—μ„œ YES), ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 단계 1304μ—μ„œ λ³€κ²½λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•œ λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ‘œ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)κ°€ νšŒμ „λ˜λ„λ‘ ꡬ동뢀(150)λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€(1305). 예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, λ³€κ²½λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯이 μ„Έλ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 μ‹λ³„λœ 경우, 도 16κ³Ό 같이 κ°€λ‘œλͺ¨λ“œμ˜€λ˜ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λŠ”, 도 1 λ‚΄μ§€ 도 3μ—μ„œ μ„€λͺ…ν•œ 바와 같이, ꡬ동뢀(150)에 μ˜ν•΄ μ‹œκ³„λ°©ν–₯ λ˜λŠ” λ°˜μ‹œκ³„λ°©ν–₯으둜 νšŒμ „λ˜μ–΄, 도 17에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이 μ„Έλ‘œλͺ¨λ“œλ‘œ μ „ν™˜λ  수 μžˆλ‹€.If it is identified that the condition information has been changed in step 1304 (YES in step 1304), the processor 170 drives the drive unit 150 so that the display 110 is rotated in a screen mode corresponding to the arrangement direction based on the condition information changed in step 1304. can be controlled (1305). For example, when the arrangement direction of the UI is identified in the vertical direction based on the changed condition information, the display 110 in the landscape mode as shown in FIG. 16 is connected to the driving unit 150 as described in FIGS. It can be rotated in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction by means of which it can be converted to a portrait mode as shown in FIG. 17 .

그리고, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 단계 1305μ—μ„œ νšŒμ „λœ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110) 상에, 단계 1304μ—μ„œ λ³€κ²½λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ μ‹λ³„λœ λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 UI의 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ λ°°μ—΄λ˜λ„λ‘ μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€(1306). 그에 따라, λ³€κ²½λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ μ‹λ³„λœ λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œ, 예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, 도 17κ³Ό 같이 νšŒμ „λœ μ„Έλ‘œλͺ¨λ“œμ˜ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)에 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ μž¬λ°°μ—΄λœ UIκ°€ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ  수 있게 λœλ‹€.Then, the processor 170 may control the plurality of menu items of the UI to be arranged in an arrangement direction identified based on the condition information changed in step 1304 on the display 110 rotated in step 1305 ( 1306 ). . Accordingly, a UI in which a plurality of menu items are rearranged can be displayed on the screen mode corresponding to the arrangement direction identified based on the changed condition information, for example, the display 110 of the rotated portrait mode as shown in FIG. 17 . there will be

상기와 같은 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œλŠ”, μ „μžμž₯치(1)κ°€ λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보 의 변경을 κ°μ§€ν•˜κ³ , λ³€κ²½λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ μ‹λ³„λœ λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ‘œ UIκ°€ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄ λ˜λ„λ‘ ν•¨μœΌλ‘œμ¨, μ‚¬μš©μžμ—κ²Œ λ”μš± 더 μ‹œκ°μ  μ•ˆμ •κ°κ³Ό μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯의 편의λ₯Ό μ œκ³΅ν•  수 있게 λœλ‹€.In the above embodiment, the electronic device 1 detects a change in the direction identification condition information, and displays the UI in a screen mode corresponding to the arrangement direction identified based on the changed condition information, so that the user can see more visually. It is possible to provide stability and convenience of user input.

ν•œνŽΈ, λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯Έ μ „μžμž₯치(1)λŠ”, 각각이 μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό μ œκ³΅ν•  수 μžˆλŠ” μ†ŒμŠ€μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ UIλ₯Ό ν‘œμ‹œν•œ μƒνƒœμ—μ„œ, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)κ°€ μ„ νƒλœ μ†ŒμŠ€μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ‘œ λ™μž‘ν•˜λ„λ‘ μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. μ—¬κΈ°μ„œ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 ν˜„μž¬ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ₯Ό μ‹λ³„ν•˜κ³ , μ„ νƒλœ μ†ŒμŠ€μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λ„λ‘ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)λ₯Ό νšŒμ „μ‹œν‚¬ 수 μžˆλ‹€. On the other hand, in the electronic device 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention, in a state in which the UI of a plurality of menu items corresponding to a source each of which can provide content is displayed, the display 110 is displayed corresponding to the selected source. It can be controlled to operate in screen mode. Here, the processor 170 may identify the current screen mode of the display 110 and rotate the display 110 to correspond to the selected source.

도 18은 λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ˜ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜μ—μ„œ μ†ŒμŠ€μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄κ°€ νšŒμ „λ˜λŠ” 일둀λ₯Ό λ„μ‹œν•œ 도면이닀.18 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a display is rotated in response to a source in the electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 18에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, 각각이 μ†ŒμŠ€μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©(1501, 1502)을 ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UIκ°€ κ°€λ‘œλͺ¨λ“œμ˜ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)에 ν‘œμ‹œ, μΌλ‘€λ‘œ ν™”λ©΄μ—μ„œ 움직이도둝 μ• λ‹ˆλ©”μ΄μ…˜ μž¬μƒλ˜λŠ” μƒνƒœμ—μ„œ, μ‚¬μš©μžλŠ” μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯λΆ€(130)λ₯Ό μ΄μš©ν•˜μ—¬ μ–΄λŠ ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ ν•­λͺ©(1501)을 μ†ŒμŠ€λ‘œμ„œ 선택할 수 μžˆλ‹€. As shown in FIG. 18 , the UI including a plurality of menu items 1501 and 1502 each corresponding to the source is displayed on the display 110 in landscape mode, for example, in a state where animation is played to move on the screen, The user may select any one item 1501 as a source by using the user input unit 130 .

μ—¬κΈ°μ„œ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ” μ„ νƒλœ ν•­λͺ©(1501, 1503, 1506)에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” μ†ŒμŠ€μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ₯Ό 식별할 수 μžˆλ‹€. 예λ₯Ό λ“€μ–΄, μ„ νƒλœ ν•­λͺ©(1501, 1503, 1506)에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” μ†ŒμŠ€κ°€ 슀마트폰과 같이 μ„Έλ‘œλͺ¨λ“œλ‘œ 촬영된 μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό μ œκ³΅ν•˜λŠ” μž₯치인 경우, κ·Έ λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλŠ” μ„Έλ‘œλͺ¨λ“œλ‘œμ„œ, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)κ°€ μ„Έλ‘œλͺ¨λ“œλ‘œ λ™μž‘ν•¨μ— 따라 μ»¨ν…νŠΈλ₯Ό ν’€ 슀크린으둜 μ œκ³΅ν•  수 있게 λœλ‹€.Here, the processor 170 may identify the screen mode of the display 110 corresponding to the source corresponding to the selected items 1501 , 1503 , and 1506 . For example, when the source corresponding to the selected items 1501, 1503, and 1506 is a device that provides content photographed in portrait mode, such as a smartphone, the corresponding screen mode is a portrait mode, and the display 110 is By operating in portrait mode, content can be provided in full screen.

ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 도 18에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, μ„ νƒλœ ν•­λͺ©(1501, 1503, 1506)을 쀌인 μ• λ‹ˆλ©”μ΄μ…˜ νš¨κ³Όμ— μ˜ν•΄ 점차 ν™•λŒ€ν•˜μ—¬ ν‘œμ‹œλ˜λ„λ‘ ν•˜λ©΄μ„œ, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œκ°€ μ „ν™˜λ˜λ„λ‘ ꡬ동뢀(150)λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€.As shown in FIG. 18 , the processor 170 causes the selected items 1501 , 1503 , and 1506 to be gradually enlarged and displayed by the zoom-in animation effect while the driving unit 150 switches the screen mode of the display 110 . can control

μ—¬κΈ°μ„œ, ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170)λŠ”, 도 18에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, μ†ŒμŠ€λ‘œμ„œ μ„ νƒλ˜μ§€ μ•Šμ€ ν•­λͺ©(1504, 1505)에 λŒ€ν•΄, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)의 νšŒμ „ λ°©ν–₯으둜 ν•¨κ»˜ νšŒμ „ν•˜λŠ” μž…μž νšŒμ „ νŠΈλžœμ§€μ…˜μ˜ μ• λ‹ˆλ©”μ΄μ…˜ 효과λ₯Ό μ μš©ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œ(170), 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(110)κ°€ νšŒμ „ν•˜λŠ” 각도 λ˜λŠ” 기울기 값에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ μ„ νƒλ˜μ§€ μ•Šμ€ ν•­λͺ©λ“€(1504, 1505)에 λŒ€ν•΄ μž…μž νšŒμ „ νŠΈλžœμ§€μ…˜ 효과λ₯Ό λΆ€μ—¬ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. μ΄λ ‡κ²Œ νšŒμ „λœ ν•­λͺ©λ“€(1504, 1505)은, μ†ŒμŠ€λ‘œ μ„ νƒλœ ν•­λͺ©(1501, 1503, 1506)의 ν™•λŒ€μ— 따라 점차 ν™”λ©΄ λ‚΄μ—μ„œ 보이지 μ•Šκ²Œ λœλ‹€.Here, the processor 170 applies an animation effect of a particle rotation transition that rotates together in the rotation direction of the display 110 for items 1504 and 1505 that are not selected as a source, as shown in FIG. 18 . can The processor 170 , for example, may apply a particle rotation transition effect to the unselected items 1504 and 1505 in response to the angle or inclination value at which the display 110 rotates. The rotated items 1504 and 1505 gradually become invisible in the screen as the items 1501 , 1503 and 1506 selected as the source are enlarged.

ν•œνŽΈ, 상기와 같은 λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ˜ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜μ—μ„œλŠ”, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯이 κ°€λ‘œ λ˜λŠ” μ„Έλ‘œλ°©ν–₯μ΄κ±°λ‚˜, ν™”λ©΄μ—μ„œ μž…μžκ°€ λΆ€μœ ν•˜λŠ” ν˜•νƒœλ‘œ λ°°μ—΄λœ 경우λ₯Ό 주둜 예둜 λ“€μ–΄ μ„€λͺ…ν•˜μ˜€μœΌλ‚˜, μ•žμ„œ μ–ΈκΈ‰ν•œ 바와 같이, UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯은 κ°€λ‘œμ™€ μ„Έλ‘œ μ™Έ λ‹€λ₯Έ λ°©ν–₯, μΌλ‘€λ‘œ λŒ€κ°μ„  λ°©ν–₯ 등도 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.On the other hand, in the electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention as described above, the case where the arrangement direction of the UI is horizontal or vertical, or the case where particles are arranged in the form of floating on the screen has been mainly described as an example, but, as mentioned above, the UI The arrangement direction may include directions other than horizontal and vertical, for example, a diagonal direction.

도 19λŠ” λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ˜ μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜μ—μ„œ 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ λ°©ν–₯으둜 λ°°μ—΄λœ UIλ₯Ό λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄ν•˜λŠ” 예λ₯Ό λ„μ‹œν•œ 도면이닀.19 is a diagram illustrating an example of displaying a UI in which a plurality of menu items are arranged in various directions in the electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

λ³Έ 발λͺ… 일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œλŠ”, μ „μžμž₯치(1)κ°€ 볡수 개 마련된 μ‹œμŠ€ν…œ ν™˜κ²½μ„ κ΅¬ν˜„ν•  수 있으며, 도 19에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, 볡수의 μ „μžμž₯치(1) 각각의 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(1610, 1620, 1630, 1640, 1650, 1660)μ—λŠ” 볡수의 ν•­λͺ©λ“€μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UIκ°€ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ  수 μžˆλ‹€.According to an embodiment of the present invention, a system environment in which a plurality of electronic devices 1 are provided may be implemented, and as shown in FIG. 19 , displays 1610, 1620, 1630, 1640, A UI including a plurality of items may be displayed on 1650 and 1660 .

각 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(1610, 1620, 1630, 1640, 1650, 1660)λŠ”, 예λ₯Ό λ“€λ©΄, 곡곡μž₯μ†Œλ‚˜, 건물 λ‘œλΉ„, 사무싀 λ“±μ˜ 벽면에 λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ ν˜•νƒœλ‘œ 배치되게 μ„€μΉ˜ κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜λ©°, μΌλ‘€λ‘œ, 도 19와 같이, 배치될 수 μžˆλ‹€.Each display 1610, 1620, 1630, 1640, 1650, 1660, for example, can be installed to be arranged in various forms on the wall surface of a public place, a building lobby, an office, etc. As an example, as shown in FIG. 19, can be placed.

각 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(1610, 1620, 1630, 1640, 1650, 1660)λŠ” μžμ‹ μ΄ μ„€μΉ˜ λ˜λŠ” 배치된 μœ„μΉ˜μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬, μ†Œμ • λ°©ν–₯으둜 λ°°μ—΄λœ 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν‘œμ‹œν•˜λŠ” UIλ₯Ό λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄ν•  수 μžˆλ‹€. 즉, 도 19의 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œλŠ”, λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보가, μ‹œμŠ€ν…œ λ‚΄μ—μ„œ 각 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(1610, 1620, 1630, 1640, 1650, 1660)κ°€ μ„€μΉ˜ λ˜λŠ” 배치된 μœ„μΉ˜λ₯Ό 포함할 수 μžˆλ‹€.Each of the displays 1610 , 1620 , 1630 , 1640 , 1650 , and 1660 may display a UI for displaying a plurality of menu items arranged in a predetermined direction in response to a location at which they are installed or disposed. That is, in the embodiment of FIG. 19 , the direction identification condition information may include a location where each display 1610 , 1620 , 1630 , 1640 , 1650 , 1660 is installed or disposed in the system.

ꡬ체적으둜, 도 19λ₯Ό μ°Έμ‘°ν•˜λ©΄, 쀑앙 상뢀에 배치된 제1λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(1610)μ—λŠ” κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 λ°°μ—΄λœ 메뉴항λͺ©(1611, 1612)λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UIκ°€ ν‘œμ‹œλ  수 μžˆλ‹€. λ§ˆμ°¬κ°€μ§€λ‘œ, 쀑앙 ν•˜λΆ€μ— 배치된 제4λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(1640)에도 κ°€λ‘œλ°©ν–₯으둜 λ°°μ—΄λœ 메뉴항λͺ©(1641, 1642)λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UIκ°€ ν‘œμ‹œλ  수 μžˆλ‹€.Specifically, referring to FIG. 19 , a UI including menu items 1611 and 1612 arranged in a horizontal direction may be displayed on the first display 1610 disposed at the upper center. Similarly, a UI including menu items 1641 and 1642 arranged in a horizontal direction may also be displayed on the fourth display 1640 disposed at the lower center.

λ˜ν•œ, 도 19에 λ„μ‹œλœ 바와 같이, 우츑 상뢀 및 ν•˜λΆ€μ— 각각 배치된 제2λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(1620) 및 제3λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(1630)μ—λŠ” κ·Έ μ„€μΉ˜ λ˜λŠ” 배치 μœ„μΉ˜μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” λŒ€κ°μ„  λ°©ν–₯으둜 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©(1621, 1630)이 λ°°μ—΄λœ UIκ°€ ν‘œμ‹œλ  수 μžˆλ‹€. λ§ˆμ°¬κ°€μ§€λ‘œ, 쒌츑 상뢀 및 ν•˜λΆ€μ— 각각 배치된 제5λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(1650) 및 제6λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(1660)μ—λŠ” κ·Έ μ„€μΉ˜ λ˜λŠ” 배치 μœ„μΉ˜μ— λŒ€μ‘ν•˜μ—¬ λŒ€κ°μ„  λ°©ν–₯으둜 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©(1651, 1661)이 λ°°μ—΄λœ UIκ°€ ν‘œμ‹œλ  수 μžˆλ‹€. μ—¬κΈ°μ„œ, 각 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(1620, 1630, 1650, 1660)의 UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯ 즉, λŒ€κ°μ„ μ˜ 각도와 κ·Έ λ°©ν–₯은 λ„μ‹œλœ 바에 ν•œμ •λ˜μ§€ μ•ŠλŠ”λ‹€.In addition, as shown in FIG. 19 , in the second display 1620 and the third display 1630 respectively disposed in the upper right and lower portions, a plurality of menu items 1621 in a diagonal direction corresponding to the installation or arrangement position thereof. 1630) arranged UI may be displayed. Similarly, a UI in which a plurality of menu items 1651 and 1661 are arranged in a diagonal direction corresponding to the installation or arrangement position is displayed on the fifth display 1650 and the sixth display 1660 respectively arranged in the upper left and lower portions. can be Here, the arrangement direction of the UI of each display 1620 , 1630 , 1650 , and 1660 , that is, the diagonal angle and the direction are not limited to the illustrated bar.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ—μ„œ 각 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄(1610, 1620, 1630, 1640, 1650, 1660)μ—μ„œ, μ†Œμ • λ°©ν–₯으둜 λ°°μ—΄λœ 메뉴항λͺ©λ“€(1611, 1612, 1621, 1631, 1641, 1642, 1651, 1661)을 μ†Œμ • λ°©ν–₯으둜 μ—°μ†μ μœΌλ‘œ μ΄λ™ν•˜λ©΄μ„œ ν‘œμ‹œλ  수 있으며, 전체 μ‹œμŠ€ν…œμ—μ„œλŠ” 메뉴항λͺ©λ“€(1611, 1612, 1621, 1631, 1641, 1642, 1651, 1661)이 μ‹œκ³„ λ˜λŠ” λ°˜μ‹œκ³„ λ°©ν–₯으둜 νšŒμ „ν•˜κ²Œ λ³΄μ΄λŠ” μ‹œκ°μ μΈ 효과λ₯Ό λ°œμƒμ‹œν‚¬ μžˆμ–΄, λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ λ°©μ‹μœΌλ‘œ UIκ°€ ν™œμš© κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜κ²Œ λœλ‹€.In an embodiment, in each display 1610 , 1620 , 1630 , 1640 , 1650 , 1660 , the menu items 1611 , 1612 , 1621 , 1631 , 1641 , 1642 , 1651 , 1661 arranged in a predetermined direction are displayed in a predetermined direction. It can be displayed while moving continuously, and in the overall system, the menu items (1611, 1612, 1621, 1631, 1641, 1642, 1651, 1661) can cause a visual effect of rotating clockwise or counterclockwise, The UI can be utilized in various ways.

일 μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆμ— λ”°λ₯΄λ©΄, λ³Έ λ¬Έμ„œμ— κ°œμ‹œλœ λ‹€μ–‘ν•œ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆλ“€μ— λ”°λ₯Έ 방법은 컴퓨터 ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨ μ œν’ˆ(computer program product)에 ν¬ν•¨λ˜μ–΄ 제곡될 수 μžˆλ‹€. 컴퓨터 ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨ μ œν’ˆμ€ μƒν’ˆμœΌλ‘œμ„œ 판맀자 및 ꡬ맀자 간에 거래될 수 μžˆλ‹€. 컴퓨터 ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨ μ œν’ˆμ€ 기기둜 읽을 수 μžˆλŠ” μ €μž₯ 맀체(예: compact disc read only memory (CD-ROM))의 ν˜•νƒœλ‘œ λ°°ν¬λ˜κ±°λ‚˜, λ˜λŠ” μ–΄ν”Œλ¦¬μΌ€μ΄μ…˜ μŠ€ν† μ–΄(예: ν”Œλ ˆμ΄ μŠ€ν† μ–΄TM)λ₯Ό 톡해 λ˜λŠ” λ‘κ°œμ˜ μ‚¬μš©μž μž₯μΉ˜λ“€(예: μŠ€λ§ˆνŠΈν°λ“€) 간에 직접, 온라인으둜 배포(예: λ‹€μš΄λ‘œλ“œ λ˜λŠ” μ—…λ‘œλ“œ)될 수 μžˆλ‹€. 온라인 배포의 κ²½μš°μ—, 컴퓨터 ν”„λ‘œκ·Έλž¨ μ œν’ˆ(예: λ‹€μš΄λ‘œλ”λΈ” μ•±(downloadable app))의 적어도 μΌλΆ€λŠ” μ œμ‘°μ‚¬μ˜ μ„œλ²„, μ–΄ν”Œλ¦¬μΌ€μ΄μ…˜ μŠ€ν† μ–΄μ˜ μ„œλ²„, λ˜λŠ” 쀑계 μ„œλ²„μ˜ λ©”λͺ¨λ¦¬μ™€ 같은 기기둜 읽을 수 μžˆλŠ” μ €μž₯ 맀체에 적어도 μΌμ‹œ μ €μž₯λ˜κ±°λ‚˜, μž„μ‹œμ μœΌλ‘œ 생성될 수 μžˆλ‹€.According to one embodiment, the method according to various embodiments disclosed in this document may be provided as included in a computer program product. Computer program products may be traded between sellers and buyers as commodities. The computer program product is distributed in the form of a device-readable storage medium (eg compact disc read only memory (CD-ROM)), or through an application store (eg Play Storeβ„’) or on two user devices (eg, It can be distributed (eg downloaded or uploaded) directly, online between smartphones (eg: smartphones). In the case of online distribution, at least a portion of the computer program product (eg, a downloadable app) is stored at least in a machine-readable storage medium, such as a memory of a manufacturer's server, a server of an application store, or a relay server. It may be temporarily stored or temporarily created.

이상, λ°”λžŒμ§ν•œ μ‹€μ‹œμ˜ˆλ“€μ„ ν†΅ν•˜μ—¬ λ³Έ 발λͺ…에 κ΄€ν•˜μ—¬ μƒμ„Ένžˆ μ„€λͺ…ν•˜μ˜€μœΌλ‚˜, λ³Έ 발λͺ…은 이에 ν•œμ •λ˜λŠ” 것은 μ•„λ‹ˆλ©° νŠΉν—ˆμ²­κ΅¬λ²”μœ„ λ‚΄μ—μ„œ λ‹€μ–‘ν•˜κ²Œ μ‹€μ‹œλ  수 μžˆλ‹€.Above, the present invention has been described in detail through preferred embodiments, but the present invention is not limited thereto and may be variously practiced within the scope of the claims.

Claims (15)

μ „μžμž₯μΉ˜μ— μžˆμ–΄μ„œ,In an electronic device, λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄; 및display; and μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯에 따라 선택 κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UI에 κ΄€ν•œ λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보λ₯Ό νšλ“ν•˜κ³ , Acquires direction identification condition information about the UI including a plurality of menu items selectable according to user input, 상기 νšλ“λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ 상기 UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 μ‹λ³„ν•˜κ³ ,Identifies the arrangement direction of the UI based on the obtained condition information, 상기 μ‹λ³„λœ λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 상기 UI의 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ λ°°μ—΄λ˜λ„λ‘ 상기 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•˜λŠ”controlling the display so that a plurality of menu items of the UI are arranged in the identified arrangement direction ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œλ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치.An electronic device comprising a processor. 제1항에 μžˆμ–΄μ„œ,According to claim 1, 상기 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ€, 제1메뉴항λͺ©κ³Ό 상기 제1메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ ν•˜μœ„ 계측인 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ 제2메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λ©°,The plurality of menu items include a first menu item and at least one second menu item that is a lower hierarchy of the first menu item, 상기 λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λŠ”, 상기 제1메뉴항λͺ©κ³Ό 상기 제2메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄ νŠΉμ„±μ— κ΄€ν•œ 정보λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치. The direction identification condition information includes information on an arrangement characteristic of the first menu item and the second menu item. 제2항에 μžˆμ–΄μ„œ,3. The method of claim 2, 상기 ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œλŠ”,The processor is 상기 제1메뉴항λͺ©κ³Ό 상기 제2메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UI에 κ΄€ν•œ, 계측방ν–₯의 νŠΉμ„± λ˜λŠ” ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯의 νŠΉμ„± 쀑 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ— κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ 상기 UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 μ‹λ³„ν•˜λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치.An electronic device for identifying an arrangement direction of the UI based on at least one of a characteristic of a hierarchical direction or a characteristic of an item direction with respect to a UI including a plurality of menu items including the first menu item and the second menu item . 제1항에 μžˆμ–΄μ„œ,According to claim 1, 상기 λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λŠ”, μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯이 μˆ˜μ‹  κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ μž…λ ₯μˆ˜λ‹¨μ˜ μ’…λ₯˜λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치.The direction identification condition information is an electronic device including a type of input means capable of receiving a user input. 제1항에 μžˆμ–΄μ„œ,According to claim 1, 상기 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ₯Ό νšŒμ „ κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜κ²Œ λ§ˆλ ¨λ˜λŠ” ꡬ동뢀λ₯Ό 더 ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λ©°,Further comprising a driving unit provided to rotate the display, 상기 ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œλŠ”, 상기 μ‹λ³„λœ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ‘œ 상기 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄κ°€ νšŒμ „ν•˜λ„λ‘ 상기 ꡬ동뢀λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•˜λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치.The processor controls the driving unit to rotate the display in a screen mode corresponding to an arrangement direction of the identified UI. 제5항에 μžˆμ–΄μ„œ,6. The method of claim 5, 상기 ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œλŠ”,The processor is 상기 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μ˜ ν˜„μž¬ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ₯Ό μ‹λ³„ν•˜κ³ ,Identifies the current screen mode of the display, 상기 μ‹λ³„λœ ν˜„μž¬ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œκ°€ 상기 μ‹λ³„λœ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” μ•ŠλŠ” κ²ƒμœΌλ‘œ 식별됨에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬, 상기 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄κ°€ νšŒμ „ν•˜λ„λ‘ 상기 ꡬ동뢀λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•˜λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치.The electronic device controls the driving unit to rotate the display based on it being identified that the identified current screen mode does not correspond to the arrangement direction of the identified UI. 제1항에 μžˆμ–΄μ„œ,According to claim 1, 상기 ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œλŠ”,The processor is 상기 μ‹λ³„λœ λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 λ°°μ—΄λœ 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ— λŒ€ν•œ μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬, 상기 λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보가 λ³€κ²½λ˜λŠ” 것을 μ‹λ³„ν•˜κ³ ,Based on a user input for a plurality of menu items arranged in the identified arrangement direction, it is identified that the direction identification condition information is changed, 상기 λ³€κ²½λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•œ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 상기 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ μž¬λ°°μ—΄λ˜λ„λ‘ 상기 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•˜λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치.An electronic device for controlling the display so that the plurality of menu items are rearranged in an arrangement direction of a UI based on the changed condition information. 제7항에 μžˆμ–΄μ„œ,8. The method of claim 7, 상기 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ₯Ό νšŒμ „ κ°€λŠ₯ν•˜κ²Œ λ§ˆλ ¨λ˜λŠ” ꡬ동뢀λ₯Ό 더 ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λ©°,Further comprising a driving unit provided to rotate the display, 상기 ν”„λ‘œμ„Έμ„œλŠ”, 상기 λ³€κ²½λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•œ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ‘œ 상기 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄κ°€ νšŒμ „ν•˜λ„λ‘ 상기 ꡬ동뢀λ₯Ό μ œμ–΄ν•˜λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치.The processor controls the driving unit to rotate the display in a screen mode corresponding to an arrangement direction of the UI based on the changed condition information. 제1항에 μžˆμ–΄μ„œ,According to claim 1, 상기 λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λŠ”, 상기 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μ˜ ν˜„μž¬ ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치.The direction identification condition information may include a current screen mode of the display. μ „μžμž₯치의 μ œμ–΄λ°©λ²•μ— μžˆμ–΄μ„œ,In the control method of an electronic device, μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯에 따라 선택 κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UI에 κ΄€ν•œ λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보λ₯Ό νšλ“ν•˜λŠ” 단계; obtaining direction identification condition information regarding a UI including a plurality of menu items selectable according to a user input; 상기 νšλ“λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ 상기 UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 μ‹λ³„ν•˜λŠ” 단계; 및identifying an arrangement direction of the UI based on the obtained condition information; and 상기 μ‹λ³„λœ λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 상기 UI의 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μ— λ°°μ—΄λ˜λ„λ‘ ν•˜λŠ” 단계λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치의 μ œμ–΄λ°©λ²•.and allowing a plurality of menu items of the UI to be arranged on a display in the identified arrangement direction. 제10항에 μžˆμ–΄μ„œ,11. The method of claim 10, 상기 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ€, 제1메뉴항λͺ©κ³Ό 상기 제1메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ ν•˜μœ„ 계측인 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ˜ 제2메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λ©°,The plurality of menu items include a first menu item and at least one second menu item that is a lower hierarchy of the first menu item, 상기 λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λŠ”, 상기 제1메뉴항λͺ©κ³Ό 상기 제2메뉴항λͺ©μ˜ λ°°μ—΄ νŠΉμ„±μ— κ΄€ν•œ 정보λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치의 μ œμ–΄λ°©λ²•. The direction identification condition information includes information on an arrangement characteristic of the first menu item and the second menu item. 제11항에 μžˆμ–΄μ„œ,12. The method of claim 11, 상기 UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 μ‹λ³„ν•˜λŠ” λ‹¨κ³„λŠ”, The step of identifying the arrangement direction of the UI, 상기 제1메뉴항λͺ©κ³Ό 상기 제2메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ„ ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” UI에 κ΄€ν•œ, 계측방ν–₯의 νŠΉμ„± λ˜λŠ” ν•­λͺ©λ°©ν–₯의 νŠΉμ„± 쀑 적어도 ν•˜λ‚˜μ— κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬ 상기 UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯을 μ‹λ³„ν•˜λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치의 μ œμ–΄λ°©λ²•.An electronic device for identifying an arrangement direction of the UI based on at least one of a characteristic of a hierarchical direction or a characteristic of an item direction with respect to a UI including a plurality of menu items including the first menu item and the second menu item control method. 제10항에 μžˆμ–΄μ„œ,11. The method of claim 10, 상기 λ°©ν–₯식별 μ‘°κ±΄μ •λ³΄λŠ”, μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯이 μˆ˜μ‹  κ°€λŠ₯ν•œ μž…λ ₯μˆ˜λ‹¨μ˜ μ’…λ₯˜λ₯Ό ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치의 μ œμ–΄λ°©λ²•.The direction identification condition information is a control method of an electronic device including a type of input means capable of receiving a user input. 제10항에 μžˆμ–΄μ„œ,11. The method of claim 10, 상기 μ‹λ³„λœ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯에 λŒ€μ‘ν•˜λŠ” ν™”λ©΄λͺ¨λ“œλ‘œ 상기 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄λ₯Ό νšŒμ „μ‹œν‚€λŠ” 단계λ₯Ό 더 ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치의 μ œμ–΄λ°©λ²•.The method of controlling an electronic device further comprising rotating the display in a screen mode corresponding to an arrangement direction of the identified UI. 제10항에 μžˆμ–΄μ„œ,11. The method of claim 10, 상기 μ‹λ³„λœ λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 λ°°μ—΄λœ 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ— λŒ€ν•œ μ‚¬μš©μžμž…λ ₯에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•˜μ—¬, 상기 λ°©ν–₯식별 쑰건정보가 λ³€κ²½λ˜λŠ” 것을 μ‹λ³„ν•˜λŠ” 단계; 및identifying that the direction identification condition information is changed based on a user input for a plurality of menu items arranged in the identified arrangement direction; and 상기 λ³€κ²½λœ 쑰건정보에 κΈ°μ΄ˆν•œ UI의 λ°°μ—΄λ°©ν–₯으둜 상기 λ””μŠ€ν”Œλ ˆμ΄μ— 상기 볡수의 메뉴항λͺ©μ΄ μž¬λ°°μ—΄λ˜λ„λ‘ ν•˜λŠ” 단계λ₯Ό 더 ν¬ν•¨ν•˜λŠ” μ „μžμž₯치의 μ œμ–΄λ°©λ²•.and allowing the plurality of menu items to be rearranged on the display in an arrangement direction of the UI based on the changed condition information.
PCT/KR2021/002311 2020-04-14 2021-02-24 Electronic device and method for controlling same Ceased WO2021210773A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1020200045017A KR102893132B1 (en) 2020-04-14 2020-04-14 Electronic apparatus and method of controlling the same
KR10-2020-0045017 2020-04-14

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021210773A1 true WO2021210773A1 (en) 2021-10-21

Family

ID=78084962

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/KR2021/002311 Ceased WO2021210773A1 (en) 2020-04-14 2021-02-24 Electronic device and method for controlling same

Country Status (2)

Country Link
KR (1) KR102893132B1 (en)
WO (1) WO2021210773A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20230161204A (en) 2022-05-18 2023-11-27 μ‚Όμ„±μ „μžμ£Όμ‹νšŒμ‚¬ Electronic apparatus and controlling method thereof

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20120001565A (en) * 2010-06-29 2012-01-04 μ‚Όμ„±μ—μŠ€λ””μ—μŠ€ μ£Όμ‹νšŒμ‚¬ Terminal device supporting pivot function and its screen display method
KR20120108904A (en) * 2011-03-23 2012-10-05 μ—˜μ§€μ „μž μ£Όμ‹νšŒμ‚¬ Method for providing a user interface and display apparatus thereof
KR20150021977A (en) * 2015-01-19 2015-03-03 인포뱅크 μ£Όμ‹νšŒμ‚¬ Method for Configuring UI in Portable Terminal
KR101702949B1 (en) * 2010-04-21 2017-02-06 μ—˜μ§€μ „μž μ£Όμ‹νšŒμ‚¬ Method for operating an apparatus for displaying image
KR20170042350A (en) * 2014-08-14 2017-04-18 λ§ˆμ΄ν¬λ‘œμ†Œν”„νŠΈ ν…Œν¬λ†€λ‘œμ§€ 라이센싱, μ—˜μ—˜μ”¨ Group-based user interface rearrangement

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR101702949B1 (en) * 2010-04-21 2017-02-06 μ—˜μ§€μ „μž μ£Όμ‹νšŒμ‚¬ Method for operating an apparatus for displaying image
KR20120001565A (en) * 2010-06-29 2012-01-04 μ‚Όμ„±μ—μŠ€λ””μ—μŠ€ μ£Όμ‹νšŒμ‚¬ Terminal device supporting pivot function and its screen display method
KR20120108904A (en) * 2011-03-23 2012-10-05 μ—˜μ§€μ „μž μ£Όμ‹νšŒμ‚¬ Method for providing a user interface and display apparatus thereof
KR20170042350A (en) * 2014-08-14 2017-04-18 λ§ˆμ΄ν¬λ‘œμ†Œν”„νŠΈ ν…Œν¬λ†€λ‘œμ§€ 라이센싱, μ—˜μ—˜μ”¨ Group-based user interface rearrangement
KR20150021977A (en) * 2015-01-19 2015-03-03 인포뱅크 μ£Όμ‹νšŒμ‚¬ Method for Configuring UI in Portable Terminal

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR102893132B1 (en) 2025-12-02
KR20210127337A (en) 2021-10-22

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2018216865A1 (en) Display device and operating method thereof
WO2016080700A1 (en) Display apparatus and display method
WO2018034462A1 (en) Image display apparatus and method of operating the same
WO2016137167A1 (en) Terminal
WO2018043985A1 (en) Image display apparatus and method of operating the same
WO2016129784A1 (en) Image display apparatus and method
WO2017159941A1 (en) Display device and method of operating the same
WO2021118130A1 (en) Electronic apparatus and method of controlling the same
WO2021132757A1 (en) Display apparatus
WO2015093637A1 (en) Server apparatus and client apparatus for sharing contents and method for sharing contents
WO2016111464A1 (en) Image display apparatus and method
WO2016204520A1 (en) Display device and operating method thereof
WO2019182323A1 (en) Image display apparatus and method for operating same
WO2022030892A1 (en) Display device and control method therefor
WO2019194457A1 (en) Electronic apparatus, method of controlling the same and recording medium thereof
WO2020111567A1 (en) Electronic device and operation method thereof
WO2020171657A1 (en) Display device and image display method of the same
WO2015186951A1 (en) Broadcast receiving apparatus and audio output method thereof
WO2016190691A1 (en) Display apparatus and control method thereof
WO2011136402A1 (en) Image display device and method for operating same
WO2021066400A1 (en) Display apparatus, method for controlling display apparatus and recording media thereof
WO2022025525A1 (en) Electronic device, server and control method therefor
WO2019221423A1 (en) Electronic device, control method therefor, and recording medium
WO2021210773A1 (en) Electronic device and method for controlling same
WO2021137558A1 (en) Electronic device and control method thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21788972

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21788972

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1